Body Electrical

Body Electrical
Body Electrical B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode

Special Tool s ....................... .................... 22-2 C ........................................................... 22-109
General Troubleshooting I nformation . 22-3 B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode
D ........................................................... 22-110
Relay and Control Unit Locations B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode
Engine Com partm ent............................. 22-7 1 and Test Mode 2 (without the
Dashboard................................................ 22-8
HDS).....................................................22-111
S eat............................................................ 22-10
Sleep and Wake-Up Mode T e s t..............22-113
D oor............................................................ 22-11
Circuit Diagram......................................... 22-114
DTC Troubleshooting............................. 22-115
Connectors and Harnesses
MICU Input T e s t....................................... 22-120
Connector Index.......................................22-12
Connector to Harness I ndex....................22-14 Keyless/Power Door
Fuse/Relay Boxes Locks/Security System
Connector to Fuse/Relay Box I n d ex ___22-54 Component Location Index....................22-122
System Description................................. 22-124
Power Distribution Circuit D iagram......................................... 22-126
Fuse to Components Index................... 22-59 DTC Troubleshooting............................. 22-130
Symptom Troubleshooting Index ........ 22-135
Ground Distribution Symptom Troubleshooting....................22-136
Ground to Components Index................22-64 MICU Input T e st....................................... 22-156
Door Lock Actuator T e s t......................... 22-162
Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Tailgate Lock Actuator T e s t....................22-164
* Removal and Install ation....................... 22-65 Door Lock Knob Switch T e s t..................22-164
Door Key Cylinder Switch T e s t..............22-166
Battery Security Horn Test/Replacement..........22-166
Battery T es t.............................................. 22-68 Security Hood Switch T e s t......................22-167
Battery Terminal Disconnection and Transmitter T e s t...... ............. .................. 22-167
Reconnection.........................................22-69 Tripped Sensor History.......................... 22-170
Battery Removal and Installation..........22-70
Parasitic Draw Check............................... 22-71 Horns
Symptom Troubleshooting....................22-74 Component Location Index....................22-171
Circuit Diagram ......................................... 22-172
Relays Horn Test/Replacem ent........................... 22-174
Power Relay T es t..................................... 22-76 * Horn Switch T e s t....................................... 22-175
Ignition Switch Exterior Lights

Component Location Index................... 22-78 Component Location Index....................22-178
Circuit D iagram .........................................22-79 System Description................................. 22-181
* Key Interl ock System Circuit Circuit Diagram ......................................... 22-182
Troubleshooting...................................22-80 Back-up Lights........................................22-184
* Key Interlock Solenoid T es t....................22-83 Brake Lights........................................... 22-185
Park Pin Switch T est................................. 22-83 Fog Lights............................................... 22-186
* Ignition Switch T est................................. 22-84 DTC Troubleshooting............................. 22-187
* Ignition Switch Replacement................. 22-85 MI CU Input T e s t....................................... 22-194
Combination Light Switch
Multiplex Integrated Control Test/Replacement................................. 22-198
System Headlight A djustm ent............................. 22-200
Component Location Index................... 22-86 Headlight Replacem ent............................22-201
General Troubleshooting I nformation . 22-87 Bulb R eplacem ent................................... 22-202
DTC Troubleshooting Index................... 22-90 Fog Light R eplacem ent........................... 22-204
System Description................................. 22-92 Fog Light A djustm ent............................. 22-205
Troubleshooting Taillight R eplacem ent............................. 22-206
B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode License Pl ate Light R eplacem ent.......... 22-207
A .......................................................... 22-107 High Mount Brake Light Replacement. 22-207
B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode Brake Pedal Position Switch T e s t .......... 22-208
B .......................................................... 22-108
Turn Signal/Hazard Warning Lights Wiper Blade Replacem ent........... 22-265
Component Location Index. . . . . . . . . . . 22-209 Wiper Arm/Nozzle Adjustm ent. . . . . . . . 22-267
Circuit Diagram . . ................................... 22-210 Washer Tube Replacement................... 22-269
DTC Troubleshooting................... ........ 22-212
MICU Input T e s t....................... 22-214 Gauges
Hazard Warning Switch Component Location Index................... 22-271
Test/Replacement............................. . 22-217 Self-Diagnostic Function. . . . — ......2 2 - 2 7 4
Circuit Diagram.................... ......... ......... 22-278
In te r io r L ig h ts DTC Troubleshooting............................. 22-283
Component Location Index................... 22-218 Gauge Control Module Input T est. . . . . 22-290
Circuit Diagram ........................... 22-219 Rewriting the ODO Data and
Front Individual Map Light Transferring the Maintenance
Test/Replacement. . . . ---- . . . . . . . . . . 22-220 Minder™ Data to a New Gauge
Ceiling Light Test/Replacement............ 22-221 Control M odule..................................... 22-293
Cargo Area Light Test/Replacement. . . 22-221 Gauge Control Module R eplacem ent.. 22-294
Console Box Light R eplacem ent. . . . . . . 22-222
Tailgate Latch Switch T e s t..................... 22-222 R e m in d e r S y s te m s
Component Location Index. . . . . . . . . . . 22-295
E n try L ig h ts C o n tro l S y s t e m Circuit Diagram....................... . 22-296
Component Location Index................... 22-223 Control Unit Input T e st........................... 22-298
Circuit Diagram ....................................... 22-224
MICU Input T e s t. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-225 A ccesso ry P o w er S o ck ets
* Ignition Key Switch T e s t......................... 22-228 Component Location Index................... 22-301
Circuit Diagram ....................................... 22-302
P o w e r W in d o w s Accessory Power Socket
Component Location Index................... 22-229 Test/Replacement................................ 22-303
System Description............................. . 22-230
Resetting the Power Window Control P o w e r M irro rs
Unit........................................................ 22-231 Component Location Index................... 22-304
Circuit D iagram ............... .......... ........... 22-232 Circuit Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-306
Power Window Master Switch Input Function T est................................. 22-308
T e s t............... .......... .............................. 22-234 Power Mirror Switch
Driver's Power Window Motor T est---- 22-237 Test/Replacement............. 22-309
Front Passenger's Power Window Power Mirror Actuator T e st....................22-310
Motor T e st................... ....................... 22-238 Power Mirror Actuator Replacem ent. . . 22-310
Rear Power Window Motor T e st. . . . . . . 22-239
Power Window Master Switch T est---- 22-240 R ear W in d o w D efogger
Passenger's Power Window Switch Component Location Index. . . . . . . . . . . 22-313
T e s t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ......................... 22-241 Circuit Diagram............... 22-314
Power Window Master Switch Switch Test/Replacement....................... 22-315
R eplacem ent................................. 22-242 Function T e s t.......................................... . 22-315
Passenger's Power Window Switch Defogger Wire Repair................. ........... 22-316
R eplacem ent....................................... 22-242
I m m o b iliz e r S y s t e m
W ip e rs/W a sh e rs Component Location Index.................. 22-317
Component Location Index.................... 22-243 System Description............................... .. 22-319
System Description. . . . . . ---- . . . . . . . . 22-245 Circuit Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-320
Circuit Diagram - W indshield............. 22-246 DTC Troubleshooting............................ 22-321
Rear W indow ................................... 22-247 Symptom Troubleshooting
DTC Troubleshooting ................. 22-248 Information ........................... ................ 22-323
MICU Input T e st..................................... 22-255 Symptom Troubleshooting Index........ 22-325
Wiper/Washer Switch Symptom Troubleshooting............... 22-326
Test/Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-259 System Check................ ...................... 22-328
Wiper Motor T e s t.................................... 22-260 Status Log..................................... ........... 22-330
Washer Motor T e st........................... 22-261 * Immobilizer-Keyless Control Unit Input
Washer Fluid Level Switch T e st. . . . . . . 22-261 T e s t .................. ............................. ....2 2 -3 3 2
Wiper Motor Replacem ent.................... 22-262 Immobilizer Key Registration............... 22-335
Wiper Arm R eplacem ent..................... . 22-264 Registration for Immobilizer System . . . 22-336
Washer Reservoir R eplacem ent---- . . . 22-264
* Immobilizer-Keyless Control Unit
Replacem ent............................ 22-336
Special Tools
Ref. No. Tool Number Description Qty

® 07AAC-000A1 AO or 07AAC-000A2A1 Rel ay Puller 1
(D 07TAZ-001020A Back Probe Adapter 1
(D 07WAZ-00101OA MFCS (MCIS) Service Connector 1
General Troubleshooting Information
Tips and Precautions • Some connectors have a clip on their side used to
attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on
Special Tools Required another component. This clip has a pull type lock.
Back Probe Adapter, 17 mm 07TAZ-001020A • Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected
unless you first release the lock and remove the
Before Troubleshooting connector from its mount bracket (A).
1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay
box.
2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and
clean and tight connections.
INOTICEI
• Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery
ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise
you will damage the alternator diodes.
• Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery
ground cable loosely connected or you will severely
damage the wiring.
Handling Connectors • Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their

wires; pull on the connector halves instead.
• Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose
wire terminals. • Always reinstall plastic covers.
• Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with
dielectric grease (except waterproof connectors).
• All connectors have push-down release type locks (A).
• Before connecting connectors, make sure the

terminals (A) are in place and not bent.
General Troubleshooting Information (cont'd)
Check for loose retainers (A) and rubber seals (B). Handling Wires and Harnesses
• Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with
their respective wire ties at the designated locations.
• Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A).
• The backs of some connectors are packed with

dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the
grease is contaminated, replace it.
After installing harness clips, make sure the harness
doesn't interfere with any moving parts.
Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust components
and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and
holes, and from exposed screws and bolts.
Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not
leave grommets distorted (B).
• Insert the connector al l the way and make sure it is

securely locked.
• Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces
down.
Testing and Repairs Five-Step Troubleshooting
• Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. 1. Verify The Complaint:
Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break
with electrical tape or shrink tubing. Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to
• Never attempt to modify, splice, or repair SRS wiring. verify the customer complaint. Note the symptoms.
If there is an open or damage to the SRS wiring or Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have
terminals, replace the harness. narrowed down the problem area.
• After installing parts, make sure that no wires are 2. Analyze The Schematic:
pinched under them.
• When using electrical test equipment, follow the Look up the schematic for the problem circuit.
manufacturer's instructions and those described in Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by
this manual. tracing the current paths from the power feed through
the circuit components to ground. If several circuits
• If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire fail at the same time, the fuse or a ground is a likely
side (except waterproof connectors). cause.
Based on the symptoms and your understanding of
the circuit operation, identify one or more possible
causes of the problem.
3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit:
Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in
step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure
is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the
most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at
points that are easily accessible.
4. Fix The Problem:
Once the specific problem is identified, make the
• Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe
procedures.
5. Make Sure The Circuit Works:
Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all
modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem.
If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of
the circuits on the fuse. Make sure no new problems
turn up and the original problem does not recur.
• Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for

identification and replacement of connector terminals.
Wire Color Codes How to Check for DTCs with the Honda
The following abbreviations are used to identify wire Diagnostic System (HDS)
colors in the circuit schematics: NOTE: For specific operations, refer to the user's manual
WHT........... ..... .................. ....White that came with the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS).
YEL............. .............................Yellow Make sure the HDS is loaded with the latest software.
BLK...........................................Black
BLU..................................... ....Blue 1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A)
GRN .............. ............. .............Green located under the driver's side of the dashboard.
RED..................................... ....Red
ORN ................ .............. ..........Orange
PNK............. ....................... ....Pink
BRN........................... ...... .......Brown
GRY..................................... ....Gray
PUR..................................... ....Purple
TAN..................................... ....Tan
LT BLU........................... .........Light Blue
LT GRN............................... ....Light Green
The wire insulation has one color or one color with
another color stripe. The second color is the stripe.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).

3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle. If
it doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page
11-193).
4. Enter to BODY ELECTRICAL, then select the desired
SYSTEM MENU.
5. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
NOTE: If the DTCs do not pertain to the selected
menu, select the All DTC Check icon to view all Body
Electrical DTCs.
6. If any DTCs are indicated, note them, and go to the
indicated DTCs troubleshooting.
Engine Compartment
Dashboard
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE

With Navigation
N A V IG A TIO N U N IT
Without Navigation
A U D IO U N IT
Seat
Front Passenger's
Door
POW ER W IN D O W M A STER SW ITC H

(Has a built-in control unit)
Connector Index
Identification numbers have been assigned to in-l ine connectors, junction connectors, termina l s, and therma l joints. The
number is preceded by the letter "C" for connectors "G" for ground terminals or "T" for non-ground terminals.
Harness Location
Engine Dashboard Others (Floor, Notes
Compartment Door, Tailgate,
and Roof)
Battery ground cable (-),G 1 Connector to Harness
(see page 22-14)
Blower resistor subharness C501 With navigation: (see
page 22-32)
Without navigation: (see
page 22-34)
Cable reel subharness G 55r Connector to Harness
(see page 22-53)
CKP sensor subharness C102 M/T: (see page 22-16)
A/T: (see page 22-18)
Dashboard wire harness C301, C302, Connector to Harness
(View of driver's side) C601, C751, (see page 22-30)
C801
G501
Dashboard wire harness C501, C502, With navigation: (see
(View of middle) C503, C504, page 22-32)
C505, C506, Without navigation: (see
C507 page 22-34)
G502
Dashboard wire harness C201, C202, G504 With navigation: (see
(View of passenger's side) C761 page 22-36)
G503 Without navigation: (see
page 22-38)
Driver's door wire harness C751 C752 Connector to Harness
(see page 22-46)
Driver's seat position sensor C604 Connector to Harness
harness (see page 22-51)
Engine ground cable T6, G2 Connector to Harness
(see page 22-14)
Engine wire harness (M/T) C101, C102, Connector to Harness
C103, C104, (see page 22-16)
S1, S3, T2,
T101
G101
Engine wire harness (A/T) (Engine C101, C102, Connector to Harness
section) C103, C104, (see page 22-18)
S1, S2, S3, T2,
T101
G101
Engine wire harness (A/T) C105, C106 Connector to Harness
(Transmission section) (see page 22-20)
Floor wire harness (Left branch) C303, C601 C602, C604, Connector to Harness
C701, C752, (see page 22-40)
C771
G601, G602
Floor wire harness (Right branch) C603, C781 Connector to Harness
G603, G604 (see page 22-42)
Fuel tank subharness C602 Connector to Harness
(see page 22-52)
Front passenger's door wire C761 Connector to Harness
harness (see page 22-47)
Harness Locati on
Engi ne Dashboard Others (Floor, Notes
Compartment Door, Tailgate,
and Roof)
Left engine compartment wire C101,T3,T4, Connector to Harness
harness (Engine compartment T5 (see page 22-26)
branch) G301
Left engine compartment wire C203, C204, Connector to Harness
harness (Dashboard branch) C301, C302, (see page 22-28)
C303
T9r G401
Left rear door wire harness C771 Connector to Harness
(see page 22-48)
ODS unit harness C603 Connector to Harness
(see page 22-50)
Right engine compartment wire G201, G202 Connector to Harness
harness (Engine compartment (see page 22-22)
branch)
Right engine compartment wire C201, C202, Connector to Harness
harness (Dashboard branch) C203, C204, (see page 22-24)
C205
G203, G204
Right rear door wire harness C781 Connector to Harness
(see page 22-49)
Roof wire harness C801 Connector to Harness
(see page 22-45)
Shift solenoid wire harness C105 Connector to Harness
(see page 22-20)
Starter cable T1,T102 Connector to Harness
(see page 22-14)
Tailgate wire harness C701 Connector to Harness
(see page 22-44)
Transmission ground cable T7, G3 Connector to Harness
(see page 22-14)
Transmission range switch €106 Connector to Harness
subharness (see page 22-20)
USB harness (Without navigation) Connector to Harness
(see page 22-38)
*: '12 model
Connector to Harness Index
Starter Cable
Connector or Terminal Ref Cavities Location Connects to Notes
T1 3 On the battery Battery terminal fuse
box
T102 2 Middle of eng i ne Starter solenoid
compartment
Battery Ground Cable

<-) 6 Left side of engine Battery negative
compartment terminal
G1 7 Left side of engine Body ground, via
compartment battery ground cable
Engine Ground Cable

T6 8 Ri ght side of engine Engine
compartment
G2 1 Right side of engine Body ground, via
compartment engine ground cable
Transmission Ground Cable

T7 5 Left side of engine Transmission housing
compartment
G3 4 Left side of engine Body ground, via
compartment transmission ground
cable
ENGINE GROUND CABLE
(cont'd)
Connector to Harness Index (cont'd)
Engine Wire Harness (M/T)

Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 6 4 Exhaust manifold
Alternator 28 4 Front of engine
Back-up light switch 12 2 Transmission housing
Camshaft position (CMP) sensor 10 3 Middle of engine compartment
ECM connector B 14 49 Left side of engine compartment
ECM connector C 15 49 Left side of engine compartment
EGR va Ive/position sensor 35 5 Middle of engine compartment
Engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor 1 8 2 Middle of engine compartment
EVAP canister purge valve 36 2 Middle of engine compartment
Ignition coil No. 1 1 3 Middle of engine compartment
Injector No. 1 33 2 Middle of engine compartment
Knock sensor 27 1 Front of engine
Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor 5 3 Middle of engine compartment
Mass air flow (MAF) sensor/lntake air 17 5 Middle of engine compartment
temperature (IAT) sensor
Oil pressure switch 26 1 Front of engine
Output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor 18 3 Transmission housing
Rocker arm oil control solenoid 24 2 Middle of engine compartment
Secondary H02S 7 4 Exhaust manifold
Starter solenoid 25 1 Front of engine
Throttle position sensor/Throttle actuator 9 6 Middle of engine compartment
Rocker arm oil pressure switch 23 2 Middle of engine compartment
C101 13 13 Left side of engine compartment Left engine compartment
wire harness
C102 11 3 Middle of engine compartment CKP sensor subharness
C103 (Junction connector) 20 24 Middle of engine compartment
S1 (Terminal joint) 19 Middle of engine compartment
T2 16 Left side of engine compartment Battery terminal fuse box
(see page 22-54)
T101 29 Middle of engine compartment Alternator + B terminal
G101 22 Middle of engine compartment Body ground, via engine wire
harness
CKP Sensor Subharness

Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor 34 3 Under the engine
C102 11 3 Middle of engine compartment
ENGINE WIRE HARNESS
Engine Wire Harness (A/T) (Engine section)

A i r fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 6 4 Exhaust manifold
Alternator 28 4 Middle of engine compartment
Camshaft position (CMP) sensor 10 3 Middle of engine compartment
EGR valve/position sensor 35 5 Middle of engine compartment
Engine cool ant temperature (ECT) 8 2 Middle of engine compartment
sensor 1
EVAP canister purge valve 36 2 Middle of engine compartment
I gnition coil No. 3 3 3 Middle of engine compartment
I gnition coil No. 4 4 3 Middle of engine compartment
Knock sensor 27 1 Front of engine
Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) 5 3 Midd l e of engine compartment
sensor
Mass air flow (MAF) sensor/lntake air 16 5 Middle of engine compartment
temperature (IAT) sensor
Oil pressure switch 26 1 Front of engine
PCM connector B 13 49 Left side of engine
compartment
PCM connector C 14 49 Left side of engine
compartment
Rocker arm oil control solenoid 24 2 Middle of engine compartment
Secondary H02S 7 4 Exhaust manifold
Starter solenoid 25 1 Front of engine
Throttle position sensor/Throttle 9 6 Middle of engine compartment
actuator
Rocker arm oil pressure switch 23 2 Middle of engine compartment
C101 12 13 Left side of engine Left engine compartment
compartment wire harness
C102 11 3 Middle of engine compartment CKP sensor subharness
Middle of engine compartment *
S3 (Terminal joint) 19
T2 15 Left side of engine Battery terminal fuse box
compartment (see page 22-54)
T101 29 Middle of engine compartment Alternator + B terminal
G101 22 Middle of engine compartment Body ground, via engine
wire harness
CKP Sensor Subharness

Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor 34 3 Under the engine
C102 11 3 Middle of engine
compartment
*: '11-12 models
CKP SENSOR
SUBHARNESS
Engine Wire Harness (A/T) (Transmission section)

A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve 6 2 Transmission housing
A
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve 8 2 Transmission housing
B
A/T clutch pressure control sol enoid valve 7 2 Transmission housing
c
Input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor 2 3 Transmission housing
Output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor 3 3 Transmission housing
2nd clutch pressure switch 1 1 Transmission housing
3rd cl utch pressure switch 9 1 Transmission housing
C105 10 8 On the transmission range Shift sol enoid wire
housing harness
C106 4 10 On the transmission range Transmission range
housing switch subharness
Shift Solenoid Wire Harness

Connector or Terminal Ref Caviti es Location Connects to Notes
ATF temperature sensor 11 2 In the transmission
Shift solenoid valve A 12 1 In the transmission
Shift solenoid valve B 13 1 In the transmission
Shift solenoid valve C 14 1 In the transmission
Shift solenoid valve D 15 1 In the transmission
C105 10 8 On the transmission range
housing
Transmission Range Switch Subharness

Transmission range switch 5 10 Side of transmission housing
C106 4 10 On the transmission range
housing
SHIFT SOLENOI D
WIRE HARNESS
Right Engine Compartment Wire Harness (Engine compartment branch)

ABS modulator-control unit 13 16 Right side of engine With
compartment ABS
A/C compressor clutch 4 3 Right front of engine With
compartment A/C
A/C pressure switch 5 2 Right front of engine With
compartment A/C
Engine coolant temperature (ETC) 3 2 Right front of engine
sensor 2 compartment
Optional connector (for fog light) 10 1 Right front of engine
compartment
Right fog light 7 2 Behind right side of front
bumper
Right front impact sensor 2 2 Behind right side of front
grille
Right front parking/side marker 1 2 Behind right headlight
light
Right front turn signal light 12 2 Behind right headlight
Right front wheel speed sensor 14 2 Right side of engine
compartment
Right headlight 11 3 Behind right headlight
VSA modulator-control unit 13 22 Right side of engine With
compartment VSA
Washer fluid level switch 8 2 Behind right side of front Canada
bumper models
Window washer motor 9 2 Behind right side of front
bumper
G201 6 Right front of engine Body ground, via
compartment right engine
compartment wire
harness
G202 15 Right side of engine Body ground, via
compartment right engine
compartment wire
harness
(cont'd)
Right Engine Compartment Wire Harness (Dashboard branch)

EPS control unit connector A 3 11 Under left side of
dash
Evaporator temperature sensor 7 2 Under right side of
dash
Optional connector (for fog 2 2 Under left side of
light) dash
Under-dash fuse/relay box 1 36 Under left side of
connector A (see page 22-55) dash
C201 10 13 Under right side of Dashboard wire harness
dash
C202 9 4 Under right side of Dashboard wire harness
dash
€203 5 13 Under leftside of Left engine
dash compartment wire
harness
€204 6 2 Under left side of Left engine
dash compartment wire
harness
€205 (Junction connector) 8 12 Under right side of
dash
G203 (for EPS) 4 Under left side of Body ground, via right
dash engine compartment
wire harness
G204 (for fog light) 11 Under right side of Body ground, via right
dash engine compartment
wire harness
(cont'd)
Left Engi ne Compartment Wire Harness (Engine compartment branch)

A/C compressor clutch relay 12 4 Left side of engine In auxiliary under-hood relay box With A/C
compartment
A/C condenser fan motor 26 2 Front of engine compartment With A/C
A/C condenser fan relay 11 4 Left side of engine In auxil iary under-hood relay box With A/C
compartment
Brake fluid level switch 6 2 Left side of engine
compartment
EPS motor 3 3 Left side of engine
compartment
ECM connector A 8 49 Left side of engine M/T
compartment
Hood sw i tch 23 2 Front of engine compartment Security
Horn 21 1 Front of engine compartment *1
Horn 24 1 Front of engine compartment *2
Left fog light 15 2 Behind left side of front
bumper
Left front impact sensor 20 2 Behind left side of front grille
Left front wheel speed sensor 4 2 Left side of engine
compartment
Left front parking/side marker 17 2 Behind left headl i ght
light
Left front turn signal l ight 9 2 Behind left headlight
Left headlight 10 3 Behind left headlight
Motor angle sensor 1 8 Left side of engine
compartment
Optional connector (for engine 18 2 Left front of engine
starter) compartment
PCM connector A 8 49 Left side of engine A/T
compartment
Radiator fan motor 19 2 Front of engine compartment
Radiator fan relay 13 4 Left side of engine In auxiliary under-hood relay box
compartment
Security horn 14 1 Left side of engine Security
compartment
Torque sensor 2 6 Left side of engine
compartment
Windshie l d wiper motor 5 5 Left side of engine
compartment
C101 7 13 Left side of engine Engine wire harness
compartment A/T
M/T
T3 27 On the battery Battery terminal fuse box (see
page 22-54)
page 22-54)
page 22-54)
G301 16 Left side of engine Body ground, via left engine
compartment compartment wire harness
*1: '09-11 models
*2: '12 model
(cont'd)
Left Engi ne Compartment Wire Harness (Dashboard branch)

Accelerator pedal position sensor 8 6 Under left side of
dash
Brake pedal position switch 9 4 Under left side of
dash
Clutch interlock switch (for starter) 10 2 Under left side of M/T
dash
Clutch pedal position switch (for 11 2 Under left side of M/T
cruise) dash
EPS control unit connector B 3 16 Under left side of
dash
Optional connector (for engine 4 2 Under left side of
starter) dash
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector 2 36 Under left side of
B (see page 22-55) dash
C203 6 13 Under left side of Right engine compartment wire
dash harness
C204 7 2 Under left side of Right engine compartment wire
dash harness
C301 12 13 Under left side of Dashboard wire harness
dash
dash
C303 14 6 Under left side of Floor wire harness
dash
T9 1 Under left side of Under-dash fuse/relay box (see page
dash 22-55)
G401 5 Under left side of Body ground, via left engine
dash compartment wire harness
HARNESS
(cont'd)
Dashboard Wire Harness (View of driver's side)

Auxiliary under-dash fuse box 28 Under left side of dash
Cable reel connector A 6 20 In steering column
Combination li ght switch 13 12 In steering column
Driver's airbag inflator 7 4 I n steering column
Fog light relay 2 4 Under left side of dash Auxiliary under-dash
relay box
Gauge control module 5 32 Behind gauge
HandsFreeLink control unit 26 32 Under left side of dash *1
HandsFreeLink control unit 26 28 Under left side of dash *2
Ignition key switch 10 6 In steering column
Igniti on switch 11 7 In steering column
Immobil izer-keyl ess control unit 9 7 In steering column
Left tweeter 3 2 Left side of dash With
tweeter
Power mirror switch 14 13 Left side of dash
Horn relay 1 4 Under l eft side of dash Auxiliary under-dash Security
relay box
Steering angle sensor 12 5 In steering column With
VSA
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector K (see page 15 10 Under left side of dash
22-55)
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector M (see page 16 34 Under left side of dash
22-55)
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector N (see page 17 8 Under left side of dash
22-55)
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector P (see page 25 4 Under left side of dash
22-55)
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector Q (see page 24 16 Under left side of dash
22-55)
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector R (see page 23 28 Under left side of dash
22-55)
Under-dash fuse/rel ay box connector S (see page 18 3 Under left side of dash
22-55)
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector T (see page 19 2 Under left side of dash
22-55)
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector W (see page 22 1 Under left side of dash
22-55)
Under-dash fuse/rel ay box connector X (see page 21 3 Under left side of dash
22-55)
Under-dash fuse/rel ay box connector Y (see page 20 3 Under left side of dash ELD
22-55)
VSA OFF switch 27 5 Left side of dash With
VSA
Wiper/washer switch 8 8 In steering column
C301 29 13 Under left side of dash Left engine
compartment wire
harness
C302 33 4 Under left side of dash Left engine
compartment wire
harness
C601 31 12 Linder left side of dash Floor wire harness
C751 32 13 Under left side of dash Driver's door wire
harness
C801 30 4 Under left side of dash Roof wire harness
G501 4 Under left side of dash Body ground, via
dashboard wire
harness
*1: '12 model with navigation
* 2 : '12 model without navigation
DASH BOAD
WIRE HARNESS
Dashboard Wire Harness (View of middle section) (With Navigation)

A/C switch 17 5 Middle of dash
Accessory power socket 22 2 Middle of dash
Auxiliary jack 19 5 Middle of dash
Bl ower motor 14 2 Under right side of dash
Console box light 20 2 Middle of dash *2
Data l ink connector 23 16 Under left side of dash
Hazard warning switch 4 5 Middle of dash
Heater control panel 18 6 Middle of dash
Heater fan switch 2 8 Middle of dash
Navigation unit connector A 25 24 Middle of dash *1
Navigation unit connector A 8 24 Middle of dash *2
Navigation unit connector B 8 24 Middle of dash *1
Navigation unit connector B 9 16 Middle of dash *2
Navigation unit connector C 7 8 Middle of dash *1
Navigation unit connector C 10 14 Middle of dash *2
Navigation unit connector D 6 12 Middle of dash
Navigation unit connector D 11 20 Middle of dash *2
Navigation unit connector E 11 14 Middle of dash *<!
Passenger's airbag cutoff indicator 12 4 Middle of dash
Rear window defogger switch 16 5 Middle of dash
TPMS control unit 1 20 Under middl e of dash
Yaw rate acceleration sensor 21 5 Under middle of dash
C501 13 8 Under right side of dash Blower resistor
subharness
C502 (Junction connector) 26 12 Under middle of dash
G502 3 Under middle of dash Body ground, via
dashboard wire harness
*1: '09-11 models
*2; '12 model
Blower Resistor Subharness (With Navigation)

Blower resistor 15 4 Under right side of dash
C501 13 8 Under right side of dash Dashboard wire harness
(cont'd)
Dashboard Wire Harness (View of middle section) (Without N avig atio n )

A/C switch 13 5 Middle of dash
Accessory power socket 17 2 Middle of dash
Audio unit connector 6 24 Middle of dash *1
Audio unit connector A 6 24 Midd l e of dash *2
Audio unit connector B 7 12 Middle of dash *3
Blower motor 10 2 Under right side of dash
Console box light 15 2 Middle of dash *2
Data link connector 19 16 Under left side of dash
Hazard warning switch 5 5 Middle of dash
Heater control panel 14 6 Middle of dash
Heater fan switch 2 8 M i ddle of dash
Passenger's airbag cutoff indicator 8 4 Middle of dash
Rear window defogger switch 12 5 Middle of dash
TPMS control unit 1 20 Under middle of dash USA
models
Yaw rate acceleration sensor 16 15 Under middl e of dash With
VSA
C501 9 8 Under right side of dash Blower resistor
subharness
C502 (Junction connector) 20 12 Under middl e of dash
C505 (Junction connector) 22 12 Under middl e of dash
C506 (Junction connector) 4 12 Middle of dash With
tweeter
C507 (Junction connector) 18 12 Under middle of dash With
VSA
G502 3 Under middl e of dash Body ground, via
dashboard wire harness
*1: '09-11 models
*2: '12 model
*3: '12 model with HandsFreeLink system
B lo w e r Resistor Subharness (Without Navigation)

Bl ower resistor 11 4 Under right side of dash
C501 9 8 Under right side of dash Dashboard wire harness
(cont'd)
Dashboard Wire Harness (View of passenger's side) (With Navigation)

A/T gear position indicator panel 12 6 Under center console A/T
light/park-pin switch
Front passenger's airbag infl ator 2 4 Under right side of
dash
Fuel tank unit 11 4 Under center console
Parking brake switch 10 1 Under center console
Right tweeter 3 2 Right side of dash
SRS unit connector A 8 39 Under middle of dash
USB adapter unit 7 14 Under right side of *
dash
C201 6 13 Under right side of Right engine compartment wire harness
dash
dash
C761 4 13 Under right side of Front passenger's door wire harness
dash
G503 1 Under middle of dash Body ground, via dashboard wire
harness
G504 9 Under center console Body ground, via dashboard wire
harness
*: '09-11 models
(cont'd)
Dashboard Wire Harness (View of passenger's side) (Without Navigation)

A/T gear position indicator panel 11 6 Under center console A/T
light/park-pin switch
Front passenger's airbag inflator 2 4 Under right side of
dash
Fuel tank unit 10 4 Under center console
Parking brake switch 9 1 Under center console
Right tweeter 3 2 Right side of dash W ith
tweeter
SRS unit connector A 7 39 Under m iddle of dash
dash
dash
C761 4 13 Under right side of Front passenger's door wire harness
dash
G503 1 Under middle of dash Body ground, via dashboard wire
harness
G504 8 Under center console Body ground, via dashboard wire
harness
USB Adapter Cable (Without Navigation)

Audio unit 13 14 Under right side of
dash
USB adapter unit 12 14 Under right side of
dash
(cont'd)
Floor Wire Harness (Left branch)

Cargo area l ight 13 2 Left side of carge
area
Driver's door switch 19 1 Left B-pillar
Driver's seat belt buckle switch 4 2 Under driver's seat
Driver's seat belt tensioner 20 4 Left B-pillar
Driver's side airbag inflator 6 2 Under driver's seat
Left back-up light 9 2 Behind left taillight
Left rear door switch 16 1 Left C-pillar
Left rear wheel speed sensor 14 2 Under floor
Left side curtain airbag inflator 17 2 Left C-pillar
Left side impact sensor (first) 21 4 Left B-pillar
Left side impact sensor 15 2 Left C-pillar
(second)
Left taillight/brake light 10 4 Behind left taillight
Left turn signal light 12 3 Behind left taillight
Right rear wheel speed sensor 7 2 Under floor
SRS unit connector B 3 39 Under middle of
dash
connector C (see page 22-55) dash
C303 2 6 Under left side of Left engine compartment wire
dash harness
dash
C602 23 Under middle of Fuel tank subharness
dash
C604 5 3 Under driver's seat Driver's seat position sensor harness
C701 S 13 Left side of cargo Tailgate wire harness
area
C752 25 4 Under left side of Driver's door wire harness
dash
0771 22 18 Left C-pillar Left rear door wire harness
G601 18 Left side of fl oor Body ground, via floor wire harness
G602 11 Behind left taillight Body ground, via floor wire harness
(cont'd)
Floor Wire Harness (Right branch)

Front passenger's door switch 5 1 Right B-pillar
Front passenger's seat belt 1 2 Under front passenger's
buckle switch seat
Front passenger's seat belt 7 4 Right B-pillar
tensioner
Front passenger's side airbag 3 2 Under front passenger's
inflator seat
Right back-up light 14 2 Behind right taillight
Right rear door switch 10 1 Right C-pillar
Right side curtain airbag inflator 15 2 Right C-pillar
Right side impact sensor (first) 6 4 Right B-pillar
Right side impact sensor 9 2 Right C-pillar
(second)
Right taillight/brake light 13 4 Behind right taillight
Right turn signal light 12 3 Behind right taillight
C603 2 4 Under front passenger's ODS unit harness
seat
0781 4 18 Right C-pillar Right rear door wire harness
G603 8 Right side of floor Body ground, via floor wire
harness
G604 11 Behind right taillight Body ground, via floor wire
harness
FLOOR WIRE HARNESS
(cont'd)
Tailgate Wire Harness

High mount brake light 1 2 Behind high mount brake
light
Left license plate light 5 2 Middle of tailgate
Rear window defogger connector A 8 1 Left side of tailgate
(+ )
Rear window defogger connector B 2 1 Right side of tai l gate
(—)
Rear w indow wiper motor 3 4 Middle of tailgate
Right license plate light 4 2 Middle of tailgate
Tailgate latch switch 7 2 Lower side of tailgate
Tailgate lock actuator 6 2 Lower side of tailgate
C701 9 13 Left side of cargo area Floor wire harness
Roof Wire Harness
Ceiling light 2 3 Roof
Map light 1 3 Front of roof
Navigation microphone 3 3 Front of roof
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector 4 8 Under left side of
G (see page 22-55) dash
dash
(cont'd)
Driver's Door Wire Harness

Driver's door lock actuator/knob 9 10 Driver's door With
switch/key cylinder switch power
door locks
Driver's door speaker 7 2 Driver's door
Driver's power w indow motor 8 6 Driver's door
Left power mirror 2 6 Driver's door
Power window master switch 1 22 Driver's door
connector E (see page 22-55) dash
Under-dash fuse/re l ay box 4 6 Under left side of
connector F (see page 22-55) dash
dash
C752 6 4 Under left side of Floor w i re harness
dash
DRIVER S DOOR
WIRE HARNESS
Front Passenger's Door Wire Harness
Front passenger's door lock actuator/knob 3 10 Front passenger's door With
switch power
door locks
Front passenger's door speaker 5 2 Front passenger's door
Front passenger's power window motor 4 2 Front passenger's door
Front passenger's power window switch 2 5 Front passenger's door
Right power mirror 1 6 Front passenger's door
C761 6 13 Under right side of dash Dashboard wire
harness (see page
22-48)
FRONT PASSENGER'S DOOR

WIRE HARNESS
(cont'd)
Left Rear Door Wire Harness

Left rear door l ock actuator/knob 1 10 Left rear door With
switch power
door locks
Left rear door speaker 5 2 Left rear door
Left rear power window motor 3 2 Left rear door
Left rear power window switch 2 5 Left rear door
C771 4 18 Left B-pillar Floor wire harness
LEFT REAR DOOR WIRE HARNESS

Right Rear Door Wire Harness
Right rear door lock actuator/knob 2 10 Right rear door With
switch power
door locks
Right rear door speaker 4 2 Right rear door
Right rear power window motor 3 2 Right rear door
Right rear power window switch 1 5 Right rear door
C781 5 18 Right B-pillar Floor wire harness
RIGHT REAR DOOR WIRE HARNESS
(cont'd)
ODS Unit Harness

ODS unit 1 4 Right side of front passenger's
seat
C603 2 4 Under front passenger's seat Floor wire harness
Driver's Seat Position Sensor Harness
Driver's seat position sensor 2 2 Inside of driver's seat
C604 1 3 Under driver's seat Floor wire harness
(cont'd)
Fuel Tank Subharness

Evaporative emission (EVAP) canister vent shut 1 2 Under middle of
valve floor
Fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor 3 3 Under midd l e of
floor
C602 2 6 Under middle of Floor wire harness
floor
1
Cable Reel Subharness
Cab l e reel 3 20 Steering wheel
HFL-navigation voice control switch 4 5 Steering wheel #1
HFL switch 4 5 Steering w hee l *2
Horn switch 2 1 Steering w hee l
Paddle shifter — (Downshift switch) 5 2 Steering wheel Five-position
transmission
Padd l e shifter + (Upshift switch) 1 2 Steering wheel Five-position
transmission
G551 6 Steering wheel *3
*1: '12 model with navigation
*2: '12 model with HandsFreeLink system
*3: '12 model
Connector to Fuse/Relay Box Index
Battery Terminal Fuse Box

Socket Ref Terminal Connects to
T1 1 Battery terminal, Starter (see page 22-14)
T2 2 Engine wire harness
M/T (see page 22-16)
A/T (see page 22-18)
T3 3 Left engine compartment wire harness (engine compartment
branch) (see page 22-26)
2 3 4
Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box
A 11 36 Right engine compartment wire harness (dashboard branch) (see
page 22-24)
A/F sensor relay 3 4
B 12 36 Left engine compartment wire harness (dashboard branch) (see
page 22-28)
Blower motor relay 2 4
C 13 49 Floor wire harness (left branch) (see page 22-40)
E 18 12 Driver's door wire harness (see page 22-46)
Electronic throttle control 7 4
system (ETCS) control rel ay
F 17 6 Driver's door wire harness (see page 22-46)
G 16 8 Roof w i re harness (see page 22-45)
H (optional connector) 15 8 Not used
Ignition coil relay 5 4
J (MICU service check 14 3
connector)
K 21 10 Dashboard wire harness (view of driver's side) (see page 22-30)
Lighting relay 4 4
Driver's door unlock relay 20 5
M 22 34 Dashboard wire harness (view of driver's side) (see page 22-30)
N 23 8 Dashboard wire harness (view of driver's side) (see page 22-30)
P (SRS) 31 4 Dashboard wire harness (view of driver's side) (see page 22-30)
PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) 6 4
PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL 10 4
PUMP)
Power window relay (P/W) 1 4
Q 30 16 Dashboard wire harness (view of driver's side) (see page 22-30)
R 29 28 Dashboard wire harness (view of driver's side) (see page 22-30)
Rear window defogger rel ay 8 4
S 25 3 Dashboard wire harness (vi ew of driver's side) (see page 22-30)
Starter cut relay (ST CUT) 9 4
T 26 2 Dashboard wire harness (view of driver's side) (see page 22-30)
W 24 1 Dashboard wire harness (view of driver's side) (see page 22-30)
X 28 3 Dashboard wire harness (view of driver's side) (see page 22-30)
Y (Electrical load detector) 27 3 Dashboard wire harness (view of driver's side) (see page 22-30)
T9 19 Left engine compartment wire harness (dashboard branch) (see
page 22-28)
(cont'd)
Connector to Fuse/Relay Box Index (cont'd)
View of front side
View of back side

Auxiliary Under-hood Relay Box
A/C compressor clutch rel ay 1 4 Left engine compartment wire harness (engine compartment
A/C condenser fan relay 2 4 Left engine compartment wire harness (engine compartment
Radiator fan relay 3 4 Left engine compartment wire harness (engine compartment
(cont'd)
Connector to Fuse/Relay Box Index (cont'd)
Under-Dash Relay Holder

Fog light relay 1 4 Dashboard wire harness (view of driver's side) (see
page 22-30)
Horn relay 2 4 Dashboard wire harness (view of driver's side) (see
page 22-30)
HOLDER
Fuse to Components Index
Battery Terminal Fuse Box

Fuse Amps Component(s) or Circuit(s) Protected
Number
1 100 A Alternator, Under-dash fuse/relay box fuses (No. 1, No. 2, No. 3, No. 9, No. 17 (via power
window relay), No. 18 (via power window relay), No. 19 (via power window relay), No. 26,
No. 27, No. 28, No. 29, No. 30, No. 32 (via lighting relay), No. 33, No. 34 (via lighting relay),
No. 37, No. 38 (via driver's door unlock relay), No. 39, No. 43, No. 47, No. 48 (via MICU), No. 51
(via MICU), No. 52, No. 54 (via rear defogger relay), No. 55 (via rear defogger relay), No. 57,
No. 58, No. 59, and No. 60), Lighting relay, Driver's door unlock relay, Power window relay
2 70 A EPS control unit
3 20 A No. 23, and No. 24 fuses in the under-dash fuse/relay box
NOTE: These fuses are not serviceable; replace the battery terminal fuse box as an assembly.
BATTERY TERMINAL FUSE BOX
JriiI oT o Y cJ
^ = ^ u _ rr j
_ ^ ,
2 3
.................. "7
o
i I- u ]
(cont'd)
Fuse to Components Index (cont'd)
Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box

Number
1 10 A MICU (VBU), Cargo area light, Front individual map light, Ceiling light, Gauge control module,
Navigation unit*1, Audio unit*2, Immobilizer-keyless control unit, Data link connector (DLC),
HandsFreeLink control unit (With HandsFreeLink system)*6
2 7.5 A TPMS control unit
3 20 A Power window master switch
4 Not used
5 10 A Back-up light (via back-up light switch) (M/T), Back-up light (via MICU) (A/T), Transmission
range switch (A/T)
6 10 A SRS unit (VB)
7 10 A PCM (VBSOL)
8 7.5 A SRS unit (VA), ODS unit, Passenger's airbag cutoff indicator
9 20 A Fog lights (via fog light relay)
10 7.5 A Auxiliary under-hood relay box, A/C switch, Power mirror switch, Rear window defogger relay,
Rear window defogger switch indicator
11 7.5 A VSA modulator-control unit (IG1)*3, ABS modulator-control unit (IG1 )*4, EPS control unit (IG1),
Yaw rate acceleration sensor*3
12 10 A MAF sensor, EVAP canister purge valve, Secondary H02S, Alternator, ECM/PCM (BKSWNC)
13 20 A Accessory power socket
14 7.5 A No. 1 (30 A) fuse in the auxiliary under-dash fuse holder, MICU (ACC), Key interlock solenoid
(A/T)
15 7.5 A MICU (DAY LT)
16 10 A Rear window wiper motor
17 20 A Power window master switch, Front passenger's power window motor
18 20 A Power window master switch, Right rear power window motor
19 20 A Power window master switch, Left rear power window motor
20 15 A Fuel pump (via PGM-FI main relay 2), ECM/PCM (IG1), Immobilizer-keyless control unit
21 15 A MICU (IG1 WASHER)
22 7.5 A Electrical load detector (ELD), Gauge control module, Shift lock solenoid (A/T), TPMS control
unit
23 10 A MICU (+ B HAZARD), Hazard warning switch
24 10 A Horn, Security horn*5, Right brake light, Left brake light, High mount brake light, ECM/PCM
(BKSW)
25 Not used
26 10 A ECM/PCM (SUBRLY), A/F sensor (via A/F sensor relay), EVAP canister vent shut valve
27 30 A MICU (+ B DOOR LOCK)
28 20 A MICU (H/L MAIN)
*1 With navigation
*2 Without navigation
*3 With VSA
*4 With ABS
*5 With security
*6 '12 model
Number
29 10 A Right front parking/side marker light, Left front parking/side marker light, Right taillight, Left
taillight, Right license plate l ight, Left license plate light, Hazard warning switch light, A/T gear
position indicator (A/T), Steering wheel switch light, Rear window defogger switch light, Audio
unit light, A/C switch light, Heater control panel light, Power mirror switch light, Passenger's air
bag cut off indicator, VSA OFF switch light*1, Console box light*5
30 30 A Radiator fan motor (via radiator fan relay)
31 Not used
32 10 A Right headlight (LO)
33 15 A Ignition coils (via ignition coil relay), ECM/PCM (MRLY)
34 10 A Left headlight (LO)
35 15 A Front passenger's door lock actuator (LOCK), Right rear door lock actuator (LOCK), Tailgate
lock actuator (LOCK)
36 15 A Driver's door lock actuator (LOCK), Left rear door lock actuator (LOCK)
37 30 A VSA modulator-control unit (FSR+B)*1, ABS modulator-control unit (FSR+B)*2
38 15 A Driver's door lock actuator (UNLOCK)
39 15 A ECM/PCM (MRLY), ECM/PCM (IGP), CKP sensor,CMP sensor, Injectors, ECM/PCM (IMOFPR),
ECM/PCM (ETCSRLY)
40 Not used
41 Not used
42 Not used
43 7.5 A A/C compressor clutch (via A/C compressor clutch relay)
44 7.5 A Transmission range switch (N, P) (A/T), Clutch switch (M/T), Starter
45 Not used
46 Not used
47 30 A A/C condenser fan motor (via A/C condenser fan relay)
48 10 A Left headlight (HI)
49 15 A Front passenger's door lock actuator (UNLOCK), Right rear door lock actuator (UNLOCK),
Tailgate lock actuator (UNLOCK)
50 15 A Left rear door lock actuator (UNLOCK)
51 10 A Right headlight (HI)
52 15 A ECM/PCM (VBETCS) (via ETCS control relay)
53 Not used
54 20 A Rear window defogger*4
55 10 A Left power mirror defogger, Right power mirror defogger
56 30 A MICU (IG1 FR WIPER)
57 30 A Blower motor (via blower motor relay)
58 30 A VSA m od u Iato r-co ntro I unit (MTR)*1, ABS m od u Iato r-co ntro I unit (MTR)*2
59 20 A*3 Rear window defogger
30 A*4 Rear window defogger, No. 55 fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box
60 50 A Ignition switch
40 A Not used
*1: With VSA
*2; With ABS
*3: Without power mirror defogger
*4; With power mirror defogger
*5: '12 model
(cont'd)
Fuse to Components Index (cont'd)
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

Auxiliary Under-dash Fuse Holder
Number
1 30 A Audio unit*1, Navigation unit*2, HandsFreeLink control unit (With HandsFreeLink system)*3
2 Not used
*1: Without navigation
*2: With navigation
*3: '12 model
Ground to Components Index
Ground Component or circuit grounded

G1 Battery
G2 Engine
G3 Transmission housing
G101 Rocker arm oil control solenoid, EGR valve, ECM/PGM, Ignition coils, Rocker arm oil pressure switch,
Data link connector (DLC), Immobilizer-keyless control unit, CMP sensor, CKP sensor, Transmission
range switch (A/T), A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A, B, C
Shielding between the ECM/PCM and the secondary H02S (sensor 2)
Shielding between the ECM/PCM and the knock sensor
G201 Right front turn signal light, Right front parking/side marker light, Right headlight, Washer fluid level
switch (Canada models)
G202 VSA modulator-control unit*1, ABS modulator-control unit*2
G203 EPS control unit
G204 Right fog light
G301 A/C condenser fan motor, Left headlight, Left front turn signal light, wiper motor, Radiator fan motor,
Left front parking/side maker light
G401 Brake fluid level switch, Hood switch (with security), Left fog light, Clutch switch (M/T)
G501 Cable reel (steering wheel switches ground), Ignition key switch, VSA OFF switch*1, Power mirror
switch, Electrical load detector (ELD), Power window master switch (including driver's door lock
switch), Driver's door lock knob switch/key cylinder switch, Left power mirror defogger, MICU (2 wires)
, Driver's door unlock relay, Blower motor relay, Gauge control module, HandsFreeLink control unit
(With HandsFreeLink system)*6, G551 (Via cable reel)*6
G502 Data link connector (DLC), MICU (2 wire's), Rear window defogger switch, Accessory power socket,
Front passenger's door lock knob switch, Right power mirror defogger, Yaw rate acceleration sensor,
Parking pin switch, Fuel pump, TPMS control unit, Heater fan switch, Navigation unit*5
G503 Navigation unit (2 wires)*3, Audio unit*4
G504 SRS unit (2 wires)
G551*6 G501 ( Via cable reel)
G601 Left rear door lock knob switch, Driver's seat belt buckle switch
G602 Left back-up light, Left brake light/taillight, Left rear turn signal light, Rear window defogger, License
plate light(s), Tailgate latch switch, Rear window wiper motor, High mount brake light
G603 Front passenger's seat belt buckle switch, Front passenger's seat sitting switch, ODS unit, Right rear
door lock knob switch
G604 Right back-up light, Right brake light/taillight, Right rear turn signal light
*1 With VSA
*2 With ABS
*3 With navigation
*4 Without navigation
#5 '09-11 models with navigation
*6 '12 model
Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box
Removal and Installation
USA models Installation
NOTE: SRS components are located in this area. Review 9. Install the relays and connect the connectors to the
the SRS component locations (see page 24-13), and under-dash fuse/relay box, then install the
precautions and procedures (see page 24-15) before under-dash fuse/relay box in the reverse order of
doing repairs or servicing. removal.
Removal 10. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of
removal.
NOTE: The imoes unit is built into the MICU which is part
of the under-dash fuse/relay box. You must register the 11. Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure (see
imoes unit when replacing the under-dash fuse/relay page 22-70).
box, or the engine will not start. 12. If the under-dash fuse/relay box is being replaced,do
1. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure (see the following with the HDS.
page 22-69). -1. Have all registered keys and the ECM/PCM code.
2. Remove the driver's dashboard undercover (see page -2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC).
20-98). -3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
-4. Select IMMOBI from the System Selection Menu,
3. Remove the fuse access panel (see page 20-97). then select IMMOBILIZER SETUP.
4. Disconnect the connectors from the front side of the -5. Select REPLACE MPCS/MICU/IMOES.
under-dash fuse/relay box (A). -6. Do the registration according to the instructions on
the HDS screen.
13. Confirm that all systems work properly.
5. Remove the mounting bolts (B) and the terminal (C).

6. Release the lock (D) and pull the fuse/relay box away
from the body.
7. Disconnect the connectors from the back side of the
under-dash fuse/relay box, then remove the
under-dash fuse/relay box.
8. Carefully remove the relays by prying under the base
of the relay (see page 22-76).
NOTE: Do not use pliers. Pliers will damage the relays,
which could cause the engine to stall or not start or
cause other functions to fail.
(cont'd)
Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box
Removal and Installation (cont'd)
Canada models 8. Carefully remove the relays by prying under the base
of the relay (see page 22-76).
NOTE: SRS components are located in this area. Review
the SRS component locations (see page 24-13), and NOTE: Do not use pliers. Pliers will damage the relays,
precautions and procedures (see page 24-15) before which could cause the engine to stall or not start or
doing repairs or servicing. cause other functions to fail.
Removal
NOTE: The imoes unit is built into the MICU which is part
of the under-dash fuse/relay box. You must register the
imoes unit when replacing the under-dash fuse/relay
box, or the engine will not start.
1. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure (see
page 22-69).
2. Remove the driver's dashboard undercover (see page
20-98).
3. Remove the fuse access panel (see page 20-97).
4. Disconnect the connectors from the front side of the
under-dash fuse/relay box (A).
5. Remove the nuts (B), then remove the stud bolts (C)
using the double nuts (D), then remove the terminal
(E).
6. Release the lock (F) and pull the fuse/relay box away
from the body.
7. Disconnect the connectors from the back side of the
under-dash fuse/relay box, then remove the
under-dash fuse/relay box.
Installation
9. Install the relays and connect the connectors to the
under-dash fuse/relay box (A), then install the
under-dash fuse/relay box in the reverse order of
removal.
10. Remove the double nuts from stud bolts (B), then
install the nuts (C) to the stud bolts.
11. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of
removal.
12. Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure (see
page 22-70).
13. If the under-dash fuse/relay box is being replaced, do
the following with the HDS.
-1. Have all registered keys and the ECM/PCM code.
-2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC).
-3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
-4. Select IMMOBI from the System Selection Menu,
then select IMMOBILIZER SETUP.
-5. Select REPLACE MPCS/MICU/IMOES.
-6. Do the registration according to the instructions on
the HDS screen.
14. Confirm that all systems work properly.
Battery Test
A WARNING Using the ED-18 Battery Tester

A battery can explode if you do not follow the proper NOTE: For set up, customization, and other available
procedure, causing serious injury to anyone nearby. features, refer to the ED-18 user's manual.
Follow all procedures carefully and keep sparks and
open flames away from the battery. 1. Connect the leads to the positive and negative
terminal of the battery.
Special Tools Required 2. Use the arrow keys to select the battery test, then
Honda Electrical System Analyzer (ED-18 Battery press enter, then follow the prompts.
Tester): Model Number INB17191840* NOTE:
Honda Battery Diagnostic Station (GR8): Model Number • Make sure to enter the correct cold cranking
MTRGR81100P* ampere (CCA) rating of the battery. You can find the
CCA printed on the label on the top of the battery. If
*To order, go to the Honda Tool and Equipment catalog the CCA rating is not entered correctly, the test
on the iN, or call 888-424-6857 result will not be accurate.
Software Version • Make sure you select FLOODED for the battery type.
3. Here are the four possible battery conditions:
Make sure you have the latest software for the ED-18 and
GR8. • Good-Battery: The battery has at least 60 percent of
its charge and requires no action.
To check the version on the ED-18, do this: • GR8 Diagnostic Needed: The battery voltage is
• Press the POWER button. below 60 percent of its state-of-charge, and the
• Read the version number on the screen. It should condition of the battery is unknown. Use the GR8 to
appear for about 3 seconds. charge the battery and properly diagnose it.
• Or you can select: Language> Options> In fo Version. • Replace Battery: The battery condition is poor.
The version number will appear near the top of the Replace it.
screen. • Bad Cell: There is an internal problem with the
battery. Replace it.
Write down the version number, then call Midtronics at
800-776-1995 to verify you have the latest software
version.
To check the version on the GR8, do this:
• Press the POWER button.
• Read the version number on the screen. It should
appear for about 5 seconds.
• Or from the Main Menu, select: Options> In fo I
Version. The version number will appear on the
screen.
Write down the version number, then call Midtronics at
800-776-1995 to verify you have the latest software
version.
Battery Terminal Disconnection
and Reconnection
Using the GR8 Battery Diagnostic Station Disconnection
NOTE: NOTE: Some systems store data in memory that is lost
• For set up, customization, and other available when the battery is disconnected. Do the following
features, refer to the GR8 user's manual. procedures before disconnecting the battery.
• On the GR8, you can select two modes: DEALER 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio
INVENTORY or CUSTOMER VEHICLE. system or the audio-navigation unit.
- DEALER INVENTORY: Use this mode for vehicles in
dealer inventory. The GR8 charges the battery to 2. Make sure the ignition switch is in LOCK (0).
80% of its state-of-charge. If the battery condition is 3. Disconnect and isolate the negative cable from the
OK, the GR8 states the battery is GOOD. If you leave battery.
the GR8 attached to the battery, it changes to Top
Off mode, and continues to charge the battery until NOTE: Always disconnect the negative cable from the
it is at 100% of its state-of-charge. battery first.
- CUSTOMER VEHICLE: In order to give a waiting 4. Disconnect the positive cable from the battery.
costomer quicker service, the GR8 charges the
battery to 60% of its state-of-charge. If the battery
condition is OK, the GR8 states the battery is GOOD.
If you leave the GR8 attached to the battery, it
changes to Top Off mode, and continues to charge
the battery until it is at 100% of its state-of-charge.
1. Connect the leads to the positive and negative
terminal of the battery.
2. Use the arrow keys to select Diagnostic, and follow
the prompts.
NOTE:
• Make sure to enter the correct cold cranking
ampere (CCA) rating of the battery. You can find the
CCA printed on the label on the top of the battery. If
the CCA rating is not entered correctly, the test
result will not be accurate.
• Make sure you select FLOODED for the battery type.
3. Here are the three possible battery conditions:
• Good-Battery: The battery state of health is good
and state of charge is at least 60%.
• Replace Battery: The battery condition is poor.
Replace it.
• Bad Cell: There is a problem with the battery.
Replace it.
(cont'd)
Battery Terminal Disconnection Battery Removal and Installation
and Reconnection (cont'd)
Reconnection NOTE: The battery terminal disconnection/reconnection
procedure (see page 22-69) must be done before and
NOTE: Some systems store data in memory that is lost after doing this procedure. Some systems store data in
when the battery is disconnected. Do the following memory that is lost when the battery is disconnected.
procedures to restore the system back to normal
operation. Removal
1. Clean the battery terminals. 1. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure (see
page 22-69).
2. Test the battery (see page 22-68).
2. Remove the two nuts (A) securing the battery setting
3. Reconnect the positive cable (A) to the battery (B) first,
plate (B), then remove the battery setting plate and
then reconnect the negative cable (C) to the battery.
the battery (C).
NOTE: Always connect the positive cable to the
battery first. A
2.9—5.9 N-m
(0 .3 -0 .6 kgf-m, 2.1 - 4 . 4 Ibf ft)
4. Apply multipurpose grease to the terminals to

prevent corrosion.
5. Install the terminal cover (D).
6. Enter the anti-theft code for the audio system or the
audio-navigation unit.
7. Set the clock (for vehicles without navigation).
Parasitic Draw Check
Installation Special Tools Required
1. Install the battery (A), then install the battery setting

plate (B). LH41 AC/DC low current clamp meter, FLULH41A*
# : Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment
C
Program, 888-424-6857
1. Make sure the battery is fully charged, and that all the
vehicle's electrical accessories are turned off.
2. Open the hood (with security).
3. Disconnect the security hood switch 2P connector to
allow the security system to arm itself with the hood
open (with security).
4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
A
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and remove the
ignition key from the ignition switch.
6. Get out of the vehicle, and close all doors.
7. Lock the doors with the keyless transmitter.
8. Make sure the map lights are turned off and the
security alarm system is armed by confirming that the
security indicator is flashing (with security).
9. Make sure the map lights are turned off and all of the
doors are closed (without security).
2. Tighten the two nuts (C) equally until the battery is
stable. 10. Wait at least 20 minutes.
NOTE: Do not deform the battery setting plate by
over-tightening the nuts.
page 22-70).
NOTE: Make sure the battery is installed correctly, and
the positive terminal and the negative terminal are
not connected in reverse.
(cont'd)
Parasitic Draw Check (cont'd)
11 .Attach the LH41 AC/DC low current clamp meter (A) to 14. Loosen the nut (A) of the battery negative terminal.
the battery ground cable (B). Follow the equipment
manufacturer's instructions, then measure the NOTE: Be careful not to disconnect the battery ground
parasitic draw. cable terminal from the battery negative terminal.
NOTE: If using a digital multimeter, go to step 13.
15. Connect the red (+) test lead (A) to the negative
Is the parasitic draw 30 rnA or less?
terminal (B) of the battery ground cable.
YES-Go to step 19. A
NO-Go to step 12.
12. Check for poor connections and loose terminals at the
battery and the alternator terminal.
Are the connections OK?
YES-Do the alternator and regulator circuit
troubleshooting (see page 4-27), and alternator
control circuit troubleshooting (see page 4-27), then
recheck. If the system is OK, the battery is flat from
natural self-discharge. Check the battery (see page
22-68), then recharge or replace the battery (see page
22-70).H
NO-Reconnect the terminals, then recheck.B
13. Check the following items before measuring:
• The multimeter dial is set to the DCA (direct current
amps) range.
• The red test probe is plugged into the red A (Amps) 16. Slide the negative terminal of the battery ground
jack, and the black test probe is plugged into the cable upwards from the battery negative terminal
COM jack. post to avoid disconnection. Then connect the black
• To avoid blowing an input fuse, start by setting the (—) test lead (C) to the battery negative terminal post.
range above 10 A.
17. Disconnect the negative terminal (A) of the battery 21. Disconnect the aftermarket electrical accessories one
ground cable from the battery negative terminal. at a time, then measure the parasitic draw.
-1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and then back to
LOCK (0).
-2. Get out of the vehicle and close all doors.
-3. Wait at least 40 seconds.
-4. Measure the parasitic draw.
Is the parasitic draw 30 mA or less?
YES-Replace or repair the aftermarket electrical
accessories that reduced the parasitic draw to 30 mA
or less when disconnected.■
NO-Go to step 22.
22. Remove the No. 1 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box, then measure the parasitic draw.
YES-Go to step 23.
NO-Go to step 25.
18. Measure the parasitic draw. 23. Connect immobilizer-keyless control unit 7P
connector terminal No. 4 and body ground with a
jumper wire.
YES-The system is normal at this tim e .l
NO-Go to step 19. IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS CONTROL UNIT 7P CONNECTOR
19. Check if there are any aftermarket electrical

J5L
accessories installed on the vehicle. | 1|2[3|4|5|6|7
B-CAN (LT GRN)
Are there aftermarket electrical accessories installed?
YES-Go to step 20. JUMPER WIRE
NO-Go to step 22.
20. Make sure that the aftermarket electrical accessories
have been properly installed. Wire side of female terminals
Are the aftermarket electrical accessories installed

correctly?
YES-Go to step 21.
NO-Repair or reinstall, or remove the aftermarket
accessories, then recheck.B
(cont'd)
Parasitic Draw Check (cont'd) Symptom Troubleshooting
24. Install the No. 1 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash Low or Dead Battery
fuse/relay box.
NOTE: A battery might be discharged under these
-1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and then back to conditions:
LOCK (0).
• Driving a vehicle 6 miles (10 km) or less per day.
-2. Get out of the vehicle and close all doors.
-3. Wait at least 40 seconds. • Leaving a vehicle parked without removing the
-4. Measure the parasitic draw. ignition key from the ignition switch.
Is the parasitic draw 30 mA or less? • Leaving the vehicle idling high electrical loads such as
headlight, wipers, rear window defogger, etc.
YES-Disconnect the control units from the B-CAN • Parking the vehicle with the hood unlatched prevents
circuit one at a time, perform steps 1-4 above, then the security system from arming, which causes
measure the parasitic draw. Do the input test for the excessive parasitic draw.
control unit that reduced the parasitic draw to 30 mA
or less when disconnected.■ 1. Check the battery (see page 22-68). Recharge or
replace the battery if necessary.
NO-Disconnect the control units from the No. 1 (10 A)
fuse circuit one at a time, perform steps 1-4 above, 2. Start the engine, and check the charging system
then measure the parasitic draw. Replace the control indicator.
unit that reduced the parasitic draw to 30 mA or less Does the charging system indicator go off with the
when disconnected.■ engine running?
25. Remove the No. 60 (50 A) fuse from the under-dash YES-Go to step 3.
fuse/relay box.
NO-Do the Charging System Indicator Stays On
-1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and then back to symptom troubleshooting (see page 4-25).■
LOCK (0).
-2. Get out of the vehicle and close all doors. 3. Check the following items:
-3. Wait at least 40 seconds. • The hazard warning switch is off.
-4. Measure the parasitic draw. • The individual map light and ceiling light switches
Is the parasitic draw 30 mA or less? are off.
YES-Go to step 26. • All of the doors, hood, and tailgate are closed.
• The brake pedal is not depressed.
NO-Remove the fuses from the under-dash fuse/relay
box one at a time, perform steps 1-4 above, then Are all check items OK?
measure the parasitic draw in order to isolate the YES-go to step 4.
circuit which contains the fault. If all circuit are OK,
check the starter circuits and do the starter NO-Turn off the switch, and check the parasitic draw
performance test (see page 4-10).H (see page 22-71 ) . ■
26. Install the No. 60 (50 A) fuse in the under-dash 4. Lock the doors with the remote transmitter LOCK
fuse/relay box. button. Make sure the security alarm system arms by
confirming that the security indicator is flashing
27. Disconnect the ignition switch 7P connector, then slowly, about once every 3 seconds.
measure the parasitic draw.
Is the security alarm system armed?
YES-Go to step 5.
YES-Replace the ignition switch (see page 22-85).■
NO-Go to the symptom troubleshooting of the
NO-Repair a short to ground in the wire between the security alarm system (see page 22-138).B
No. 60 (50 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box
and ignition switch.■
5. Check the following items with the ignition key
removed from the ignition switch:
• The brake lights are off when the brake pedal is not
pressed.
• The cargo area light is off with the tailgate closed.
• The radiator and condenser fans are not running.
• The audio (including navigation) is off.
• There is no operating sound from the ABS or VSA
modulator-control unit.
• The rear window defogger and the power mirror
defoggers* are off.
*: With power mirror defogger
Are all check items OK?
YES-Check the parasitic draw (see page 22-71 ) . ■

NO-Troubleshoot and repair the affected circuits.!
Power Relay Test
Special Tools Required Normally-open Four-terminal Type

Relay Fuller 07AAC-000A1 AO or 07AAC-000A2A1
Check for continuity between the terminals:
Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the • There should be continuity between terminals No. 1
test listed for it and No. 2 when battery power is connected to
terminal No. 4, and body ground is connected to
Relay Test terminal No. 3.
A/C compressor clutch relay Normally-
A/C condenser fan relay open • There should be no continuity between terminals
A/F sensor relay* Four-terminal No. 1 and No. 2 when power is disconnected.
Blower motor relay* type
Resistance type Diode type
ETCS control relay*
Fog light relay
Horn relay
Ignition coil relay*
© ©
4 2
ib— n
Lighting relay"
PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN)*
PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP)*
Power window relay (P/W)*
V
£ ifcii
Radiator fan relay 3 1
Rear window defogger relay*
Starter cut relay (ST CUT)*
©
Driver's door unlock relay* Five-terminal
type
*:Carefully remove the relay from the under-dash
fuse/relay box using the relay puller. Do not use
pliers. Pliers will damage the relay.
Five-terminal Type
Check for continuity between the terminals:
• There should be continuity between terminals No. 1
and No. 2 when battery power is connected to
terminal No. 5, and body ground is connected to
terminal No. 3.
and No. 4 when power is disconnected.
Diode type
©
1 5
©
Component Location Index
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX STEERING LOCK ASSEMBLY

Circuit Diagram
*1; '09-10 models and '11-12 models (M/T)

*2; '11-12 models (A/T)
IGNITION SWITCH
) 0FF ACC HOT in ACC (I)

UNDER-DASH ACC 5 and ON (II)
BATTERY TERMINAL FUSE BOX FUSE/RELAY BOX
IG1 HOT in ON (II)
■° ,o , 6 and START (III)
4 IG2 HOT in ON (II)

V G2
ST 1 ST HOT in START (III)
I
G502
Key Interlock System Circuit Troubleshooting
NOTE: SRS components are located in this area. Review 10. Check for continuity between steering lock 6P
the SRS component locations (see page 24-13), and connector terminal No. 3 and body ground.
precautions, and procedures (see page 24-15) before
doing repairs or servicing. STEERING LOCK ASSEMBLY 6P CONNECTOR
1. Check the A/T system DTCs with the HDS.

Are DTCs P0705 and/or P0706 indicated?
YES-Go to DTC troubleshooting P0705 (see page 2 3 14 X I /

14-89), P0706 (see page 14-90). KEYSOL (LT BLU)
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Move the shift lever to P and set the parking brake.
3. Remove the steering column covers (see page Wire s i de of female terminals
20-105).
4. Disconnect the steering lock 6P connector.
5. Turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (I). Is there continuity?
6. Check if the ignition switch can be turned to LOCK (0). YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire
between the key interlock solenoid and the MICU.H
Can the ignition switch be turned to LOCK (0)?
NO-Go to step 11 . ■
YES-Go to step 10.
11. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay
NO-Replace the steering lock (see page 17-16).■
box connector M (34P) terminal No. 17 and steering
7. Check the No.14 (7.5A) fuse in the under-dash lock 6P connector terminal No. 3.
fuse/relay box. UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR M (34P)
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 8.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 / 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
NO-Replace the fuse. If the fuse blows again, repair a 18 / 20 21 / 23 24 / / / / / / / / 33 34
short to ground in the No. 14 (7.5A) fuse circuit. KEY SOL (LT BLU)
8. Make sure the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0).

9. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector M
KEY SOL (LT BLU)
(34P).
1 2 3 4 / /
STEERING LOCK ASSEMBLY 6P CONNECTOR
Wire si de of female termina l s
Is there continuity?
YES-Go to step 12.

NO-Repair an open or high resistance in the wire
between the key interlock solenoid and the MICU.H
12. Move the shift lever P position.
13. Remove the center console (see page 20-93).
14. Disconnect the park pin switch 2P connector.
15. Do the park pin switch test (see page 22-83). 17. Check for continuity between park pin switch 2P
connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
Is the switch OK?
YES-Go to step 16.

NO-Check the park pin switch installation. If the PARK PIN SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR
switch installation is OK, replace the switch (see page
14-243) and retest.■
16. Check for continuity between park pin switch 2P
PARK PIN SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR
W ire side offem ale terminals

YES-Go to step 18.

NO-Repair an open or high resistance in the ground
wire or poor ground (G502).H
18. Check the A/T system Data List with the HDS.
W ire side of female terminals
Is the transmission range switch indicated ON when the
Is there continuity? shift lever is in P, and is the transmission range switch
indicated OFF when the shift lever is shifted to any
YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire between position other than P?
park pin switch 2P connector terminal No. 2 and the
MICU.! YES-Go to step 20.
NO-Go to step 17. NO-Go to step 19.
19. Do the transmission range switch test (see page
14-226).
Is the switch OK?
YES-Go to step 20.

NO-Check the transmission range switch installation.
If the switch installation is OK, replace the switch (see
page 14-228) and retest.■
20. Disconnect the transmission range switch 10P
connector.
(cont'd)
Key Interlock System Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
21. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay 22. Check for continuity between transmission range
box connector B (36P) terminal No. 32 and switch 10P connector terminal No. 5 and body
transmission range switch 10P connector terminal ground.
No. 2.
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR B (36P) TRANSMISSION RANGE
SWITCH 10P CONNECTOR
(3ND (BLK)
„ [ 2] |( 3 j / 1 5 1 6 ( / I 8 | | 9 |/1 /I l2 |l3 |l4 ||(1 5 ) |_
] liejlVlXI
[22] (23124I25 l ^ j 271281
\A20\2i\ [/] [
l29[30l31 (32|33[34l
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10
ATPP (LT BLU)
ATPP (GRN)
1 Wire side of female term i nals
10 Is there continuity?
TRANSMISSION RANGE YES- Faulty MICU, replace the under-dash fuse/relay
box.H
Wire side offem ale terminals • USA models (see page 22-65)
Is there continuity? • Canada models (see page 22-66)
YES-Go to step 22. NO-Repair an open or high resistance in the ground
wire or poor ground (G101).H
between transmission range switch 10P connector
terminal No. 2 and MICU.H
Key Interlock Solenoid Test Park Pin Switch Test
NOTE: SRS components are located in this area. Review 1. Remove the center console (see page 20-93).
the SRS component locations (see page 24-13), and
precautions and procedures (see page 24-15) before 2. Check the Park Pin Switch signal with the HDS in the
doing repairs or servicing. A/T data list while the shift lever is in P, and when the
shift lever is moved to any position other than P.
1. Remove the steering column covers (see page
20-105). NOTE:lf the HDS dose not communicate with the
PCM, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-193)
2. Disconnect the steering lock assembly 6P connector
Terminal side of male terminals
(A).
3. Check that the park pin switch signal is OFF while the
shift lever is in P, and signal is ON when the shift lever
is moved out of P.
4. If the park pin switch signal is OK, test is complete,
disconnect the HDS.If the signal is incorrect, go to
step 5, and test the switch signal at the park pin
switch/AT gear position indicator panel light
connector.
5. If the park pin switch tests OK, connect the connector
3. Insert the ignition key in the key cylinder, then turn the and install the center console (see page 20-93).
ignition key to ACCESSORY (I).
6. If the park pin switch tests incorrectly, test the park pin
4. Connect the positive battery terminal to steering lock switch at the park pin switch 2P connector.
assembly connector terminal No. 4, and connect the
negative battery terminal to terminal No. 3. Check that
the ignition key cannot be turned to LOCK (0). Release
the battery terminals, and check that the key can be
turned to the LOCK (0) position and removed from the
cylinder.
5. If the key interlock solenoid works improperly, replace
the steering lock assembly (see page 17-16).
(cont'd)
Park Pin Switch Test (cont'd) Ignition Switch Test
7. Disconnect the park pin switch 2P connector, and NOTE: SRS components are located in the area. Review
remove it from the bracket base. the SRS component locations (see page 24-13), and
precautions and procedures (see page 24-15) before
doing repairs or servicing.
page 22-69).
20-105).
3. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the ignition
switch (B).
8. Shift into P, and check for continuity between park pin

switch 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2. Do not
press the shift lever button. There should be no
continuity.
9. Shift out of P, and check for continuity between
connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2. There should be
continuity. 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each
10. If the park pin switch tests OK at the 2P connector, switch position according to the table.
there is an open or short in the wire between shift lock
solenoid/park pin switch/A/T gear position indicator Terminal 5 3 6 4 1
panel light connector and the 2P connector. Replace Position
(ACC) (BAT) (101) (IG2) (ST)
the shift lock solenoid (see page 14-241); the shift lock
solenoid is combined with the park pin switch harness 0 (LOCK)
and the indicator panel light harness/socket, and
supplied as an assembly.
I (ACC) O -o
II (ON)
11. If the park pin switch fails the test, replace the park pin
switch (see page 14-243).
III (START) 0 “ -o- -o
12. Install the center console (see page 20-93). 5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the ignition
page 22-70).
Ignition Switch Replacement
NOTE: SRS components are located in the area. Review

page 22-69).
20-105).
3. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the ignition
switch (B).
4. Remove the two screws and the ignition switch.

5. I nstall the parts in the reverse order of removal.
page 22-70).
HANDSFREELI NK CONTROL UNI T

('12 model without navigation)
General Troubleshooting Information
Troubleshooting CAN Circuit Related Problems

NOTE: Check the ECM/PCM for DTCs and troubleshoot ECM/PCM (see page 11-3) or F-CAN loss of communication
errors first
Using the HDS (Preferred method)
Connect the HDS to the Data Link Connector (DLC).
There are two ways to read B-CAN codes with the HDS:
First method: On the HDS, select BODY ELECTRICAL, then select the subsystem that relates to the problem (for
example: door locks, keyless, security, etc.), and then last, select the DTCs.
Second method: Ground the SCS circuit with the HDS, then read the DTCs displayed in the gauge control module, then
go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-107).
Using the B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode 1 {Use only if the HDS is unavailable)
1. Check for communication circuit problems using the B-CAN System Diagnostic Test Mode 1 (see page 22-111).
2. Check for DTCs.
3. If there are DTCs stored, sort them, and then troubleshoot the DTCs in this order.
-1. Battery voltage DTCs
-2. Internal error DTCs
-3. Loss of communication DTCs
NOTE: I f DTC B1000 is stored, troubleshoot DTC B1000 first.
-4. Signal error DTCs
4. If no DTCs are found, use the B-CAN System Diagnostic Test Mode 2 to check all inputs related to the failure (see page
22 - 1 11 ).
(cont'd)
How to Display DTCs on the Gauge Control Module

Enter B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode 1 (see page 22-111). While in Test Mode 1, when communication between the
MICU and the gauge control module is normal, the DTCs which have been detected and stored individually by various
B-CAN (Body-Controller Area Network) units are shown one by one on the LCD display. To scroll through the DTCs,
press the SELECT/RESET button.
DTC detected (the four digits displ ayed

^ represent the DTC)
Control unit I.D. number
No DTCs detected
All DTCs have been displayed
The unit that has stored the code can be identified by the number shown on the odo/trip display.
Control Unit Control Unit I.D.
Number
MICU 10
Gauge control module 50
HandsFreeLink control unit 94
('12 model without navigation)
Immobilizer-keyless control unit 96
How to Clear the DTCs
1. Enter B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode 1 (see page 22-111).
2. While in Test Mode 1, press and hold the SELECT/RESET button for at least 10 seconds to clear the DTCs.
Loss of Communication DTC Cross-Reference Chart
When an ECU on the CAN circuit is unable to communicate with other ECUs on the CAN circuit, the other control units
set loss of communication DTCs. Use this chart to find the control unit that is not communicating with the other control
units on the CAN circuit.
1. Find the transmitting control unit that is in the same row as all of the loss of communication DTCs retrieved.
2. Do the input test for the transmitting control unit.
BUS-OFF and Internal Error Codes

DTC type Related Unit
MICU Gauge Control Immobilizer-Keyless HandsFreeLink
Module Control Unit Control Unit
BUS-OFF B1000 B1150 B1900 U1280
ECU (EEPROM) Error B1002 B1152 B1792
Transmitting Message Receiving Unit/Loss of Communication DTC

Control Unit MICU Gauge Control Immobilizer-Keyless
Module Control Unit
MICU RM B1188
HLSW B1155
WIPSW B1156
MICU B1157
DOORSW B1159
DRLOCKSW B1905
Gauge Control VSP/NE B1011
Module A/T B1906
ECM/PCM ENG B1168
A/T B1169
VSA Modulator- VSA/ABS B1170
Control Unit*1
ABS Modulator-
Control Unit*2
EPS Control Unit EPS B1183
SRS SRS B1187
TPMS TPMS B1173
*1: With VSA
*2: With ABS
DTC Troubleshooting Index
NOTE: Record all DTCs, all sort them by DTC type using the following DTC troubleshooting indexes, then troubleshoot
the DTC(s) in this order:
• Battery voltage DTCs
• internal error DTCs
• Loss of communication DTCs (beginning with the lowest number first; for example, if B1011 and B1036 are retrieved,
troubleshoot B1011 first).
• Signal error DTCs
MICU
DTC Description DTC type Page
B1000 Communication circuit error (BUS Off) Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
communication (see page 22-115)
B1002 MICU internal error (EEPROM error) Internal error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-116)
B1011 MICU lost communication with Gauge Control Module Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
(VSP/NE message) communication (see page 22-116)
B1028 Rear wiper motor (Park) signal error Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-248)
B1036 IG1 Power supply Circuit Malfunction Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-117)
B1077 Windshield wiper motor (Park) signal error Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-250)
B1078 Daytime Running Light for Canada Circuit Malfunction Bulb failure DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-187)
B1079 Daytime Running Light for USA Circuit Malfunction Bulb failure DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-187)
B1127 Driver's door key cylinder switch input Circuit Malfunction Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
(Simultaneous input of lock and unlock signal) (see page 22-130)
B1128 Driver's door remote switch input Circuit Malfunction Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
B1129 Driver's door knob switch input Circuit Malfunction Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
B1275 Head light OFF position Circuit Malfunction Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-189)
B1276 Head light switch parking (small) position circuit Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
malfunction (see page 22-189)
B1278 Head light ON position Circui t Malfunction Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-189)
B1279 Dimmer switch Circuit Malfunction Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-191)
B1280 Turn signal switch Circuit Malfunction Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-212)
B1281 Front wiper MIST position Circuit Malfunction Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-252)
B1282 Front wiper INT(AUTO) position Circuit Malfunction Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-252)
B1283 Front wiper LOW position Circuit Malfunction Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-252)
B1284 Front wiper HIGH position Circuit Malfunction Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-252)
Gauge Control Module
B1152 Gauge control module internal (EEPROM) error Internal error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-283)
B1155 Gauge control module lost communication with MICU Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
(headlight switch message) communication (see page 22-283)
B1156 Gauge Control Module lost communication with MICU Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
(wiper switch message) communication (see page 22-283)
B1157 Gauge control module lost communication with the MICU Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
(MICU message) communication (see page 22-283)
(DOORSW message) communication (see page 22-283)
B1168 Gauge control module lost communication with the PCM Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
(Engine messages) communication (see page 22-284)
B1169 Gauge control module lost communication with the PCM Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
(A/T messages) communication (see page 22-284)
B1170 Gauge control module lost communication with the Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
VSA/ABS modulator-control unit (VSA/ABS message) communication (see page 22-285)
B1173 Gauge control module lost communication with TPMS Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
control unit (TPMS message) communication (see page 22-286)
B1183 Gauge control module lost communication with EPS Unit Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
B1187 Gauge control module lost communication with the SRS Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
Unit (SRS message) communication (see page 22-288)
(RM message) communication (see page 22-289)
Immobilizer-Keyless Control Unit
B1905 Immobilizer unit lost communication with MICU(door lock Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
switch message) communication (see page 22-321)
B1906 Immobilizer unit lost communication with Gauge control Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
module(A/T message) communication (see page 22-321)
HandsFreeLink Control Unit ('12 model without navigation)
B1775 Microphone input/output shorted to power or open Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 23-340)
B1776 Microphone input/output shorted to ground Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 23-344)
B1779 HandsFreeLink steering wheel switch failure Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 23-347)
B1780 HandsFreeLink steering wheel switch line short Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 23-349)
B1792 HandsFreeLink control module error Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 23-351)
U1280 Communication bus line error (BUS-OFF) Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
System Description
Body Controller Area Network (B-CAN) and Fast Controller Area Network (F-CAN)
The body controller area network (B-CAN) and the fast controller area network (F-CAN) share information between
multiple electronic control units (ECUs). B-CAN communication moves at a slower speed (33.33 kbps) for convenience
related items and for other functions. F-CAN information moves at a faster speed (500 kbps) for "real time" functions
such as fuel and emissions data. To allow both systems to share information, the gauge control module translates
information from B-CAN to F-CAN and from F-CAN to B-CAN.This is called the Gateway Function.

(F-CAN)
F-CAN
ECM/PCM TRANSCEIVER
F-CAN L
B-CAN
TRANSCEIVER
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
• DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC) (B-CAN)

• SRS UNIT
■ VSA MODULATOR-
CONTROL UNIT*1
■ YAW RATE ACCELERATION
SENSOR*1
• ABS MODULATOR-
CONTROL UNIT*2
• EPS CONTROL UNIT IMMOBILIZER-
■ TPMS CONTROL UNIT KEYLESS CONTROL
■ AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT*3 UNIT
HANDSFREELINK
CONTROL UNIT*4
*1 With VSA
*2 With ABS
*3 "12 m odel with navigation
*4 '12 model w ith out navigation
CAN line
Gateway Function
The gauge control module acts as a gateway to allow both systems to share information. The gauge control module
translates and relays the information from B-CAN to F-CAN and from F-CAN to B-CAN.
BAT IG1
Network "Loss of Communication" Error Checking Function

The ECUs on the CAN circuit send messages to each other. If there are any malfunctions on the network, the LCD display
on the gauge control module can indicate the error messages by entering the gauge control module self-diagnostic
function (see page 22-274).
(cont'd)
System Description (cont'd)
Self-diagnostic Function
By connecting the HDS to the data link connector (DLC), the HDS can retrieve the diagnostic information from the MICU
via a diagnostic line called K-LINE. The K-LINE is separate from the CAN lines, and is connected to the CAN related ECUs.
The MICU is a gateway between the HDS and B-CAN related ECUs, and it sends B-CAN diagnostic information to the
HDS. When doing a function test with the HDS, the HDS sends an output signal through the K-LINE to the MICU. The
MICU either relays the request to another ECU or commands the function itself.
F-CAN H F-CAN L B-CAN

t
------,------------ f
F-CAN (500 kbps) | , B-CAN (33.33 kbps)
1 I 1
.-------- « ,
SRS UNIT I * - • MICU
T I i
1
» *1 I
1
J I 1 I
1
1 1 * 1 I
J i 1 I IMMOBILIZER-
ECM/PCM — r - - - 4 KEYLESS
i T CONTROL UNIT
I i i
i i i
--------------------
I i i i
AUDIO-NAVIGATION
i
i
I
I
i
EPS CONTROL UNIT

UNIT*3
i
I
i i I
i i (
. —0. 4 — .
1
1
1
i i
i I
VSA MODULATOR- . . i
f *• CONTROL UNIT*1 AUDIO UNIT*5
i i >
: 1 1 1
1 1 1
: YAW RATE
ACCELERATION — - f - - - 4 L_. HANDSFREELINK
CONTROL UNIT*6
: SENSOR*1 i
I I
AL
*1 : With VSA
1 f * 2: With ABS
*3 : '09-11 models with navigation
HDS
* 4 : '12 model with navigation
* 5 : Without navigation
*6 : '12 model without navigation
— . : CAN line
- • * : Other communication line
Wake-up and Sleep Function
The multiplex integrated control system has wake-up and sleep functions to decrease parasitic draw on the battery
when the ignition switch is at LOCK (0).
• In the sleep mode, the multiplex integrated control system stops functioning (communication and CPU control) when
it is not necessary for the system to operate.
• As soon as any operation is requested (for example, a door is unlocked), the related control units in the sleep mode
immediately wake-up and begin to function.
• When the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0) with all the doors and the tailgate closed, and the driver's door is
opened then closed, there is a delay of about 40 seconds before the control unit goes from the wake-up mode to the
sleep mode.
• The sleep mode will not function if any door or the tailgate is open or if a key is in the ignition switch.
• Electrical draw is reduced from 200 mA to less than 35 mA when in sleep mode.
NOTE: Sleep and Wake-Up Mode Test (see page 22-113).
Fail-Safe Function
To prevent improper operation, the MICU has a fail-safe function. In the fail-safe mode, the output signal is fixed when
any part of the system malfunctions (for example, a faulty control unit or communication line).
Each control unit has a hardware fail-safe function that fixes the output signal when there is a CPU malfunction and a
software fail-safe function that ignores the signal from a malfunctioning control unit, which allows the system to
continue operating normally.
Hardware Fail-Safe Control
Fail-safe function
When a CPU problem or an abnormal power supply voltage is detected, the MICU moves to the hardware fail-safe
mode, and each system output load is set to the pre-programmed fail-safe value.
Software Fail-Safe Control
When any of the data from the B-CAN circuit cannot be received within a specified time, or an unusual combination of
data is recognized, the MICU moves to the software fail-safe mode. The data that cannot be received is forced to a
pre-programmed value.
(cont'd)
Power Supply Voltage Monitoring Function

The MICU monitors the power supply voltage (back-up voltage). Ifthe voltage drops below 10 V, the MICU will not store
DTCs.
Input Output
MICU Battery voltage (VBU)
B-CAN MICU (UNDER 10 V) message
Combination Light Switch

The MICU controls the lighting system based on input from the combination light switch.
Input Output
MICU IG1 power supply Headlights (LO)
Combination light switch (OFF) Headlights (HI)
Combination light switch (ON) Side marker lights
Combination light switch (PARKING) Parking lights
Combination light switch (PASSING) Taillights
Combination light switch (DIMMER)
B-CAN Combination light switch (PARKING) message
Combination light switch (HLLO) message
Combination light switch (HLHI) message
Combination light switch (PASSING) message
Fog Lights
The MICU controls the fog lights based on input signal from the fog light switch.
Input Output
MICU IG1 power supply Fog light relay
Combination light switch (OFF)
Combination light switch (ON)
Combination light switch (FOG)
B CAN Combination light switch (FRFOG) message
RM (FRFOGRLY) message
Turn Signal/Hazard Warning Lights

The MICU controls the turn signal/hazard warning lights based on input from the turn signal switch and the hazard
warning switch.
Input Output
MICU IG1 power supply Turn signal lights (LEFT)
Hazard warning switch Turn signal lights (RIGHT)
Turn signal switch (LEFT)
Turn signal switch (RIGHT)
B-CAN MICU (HAZARDSW) message
MICU (TURNRLY) message
Turn signal switch (TURNL) message
Turn signal switch (TURNR) message
Entry Light
The MICU controls the interior lights based on input signals of each switch and B-CAN signals.
Input Output
MICU IG1 power supply Ceiling light
Ignition key switch
Driver's door switch
Front passenger's door switch
Left rear door switch
Right rear door switch
Driver's door lock knob switch (LOCK/UNLOCK)
B-CAN Keyless door lock signal
Cargo Area Light

The MICU controls the cargo area light based on the tailgate latch switch.
Input Output
MICU Tailgate latch switch Cargo area light
Daytime Running Lights

The MICU controls the headlights as daytime running lights based on input from each switch and B-CAN signals.
Input Output
Combination light switch (OFF) Headlights (HI)
Combination light switch (ON) Side maker lights
Combination light switch (PASSING) Taillights
Combination light switch (DIMMER)
B-CAN Parking brake switch signal RM (DRLKC) message
IG1 METER signal RM (DRLWRN) message
Windshield Wiper/Washer
The MICU controls the windshield wiper motor and windshield washer motor based on input signals from each switch
and B-CAN signals.
Input Output
MICU IG1 power supply Windshield Wiper motor (INT)
Windshield Wiper switch (INT) Windshield Wiper motor (LO)
Windshield Wiper switch (LO) Windshield Wiper motor (HI)
Windshield Wiper switch (HI) Windshield Washer motor
Windshield Wiper switch (MIST)
Windshield Washer switch
Windshield Wiper motor (AUTO STOP)
Brake pedal position switch
Transmission range switch (P) position (A/T)
B-CAN IG1 METER signal Windshield wiper switch (FRINT) message
Parking brake switch signal Windshield wiper switch (FRWIPLO) message
Vehicle speed pulse signal Windshield wiper switch (FRWIPHI) message
Windshield washer switch (FRWASH) message
Windshield wiper switch (FRMIST) message
Windshield wiper motor (FRWIPAS) message
(cont'd)
Rear Window Wiper/Washer

The MICU controls the rear window wiper motor and rear window washer motor based on inputs from each switch.
Input Output
MICU IG1 power supply Rear window wiper motor
Rear window wiper motor switch Rear window washer motor
Rear window washer motor switch
Windshield washer switch
Windshield wiper switch (INT)
Windshield wiper switch (LO)
Windshield wiper switch (HI)
Back-up light switch (M/T)
Transmission range switch (R) position (A/T)
B-CAN Windshield washer switch (FRWASH) message
Rear window washer switch (RRWASH) message
Windshield/Rear Window Washer

The MICU controls the windsheild washer and the rear window washer motor based on inputs from each switch.
Input Output
MICU IG1 power supply Rear window washer motor
Windshield washer motor switch Windshield washer motor
Rear window washer motor switch
B-CAN Windshield washer switch (FRWASH) message
Rear window washer switch (RRWASH) message
Power Window Timer (Key-Off Operation)

The MICU controls the power window key-off operation based on inputs from each switch.
Input Output
MICU IG1 power supply Power window timer
Ignition key switch
Collision Detection Signal (CDS)

The MI CU controls the door lock actuators based on the IG1 and SRS (CDS) inputs.
Input Output
MICU IG1 power supply Door/Tailgate lock actuators (UNLOCK)
B-CAN SRS (CDSFR) message
SRS (CDSSD) message
SRS (CDSRR) message
SRS (CDSRO) message
Power Door Locks
The MICU controls the door lock actuators based on inputs from each switch.
Input Output
MICU IG1 power supply Door/Tailgate lock actuators (LOCK)
Ignition key switch Door/Tailgate lock actuators (UNLOCK)
Tailgate latch switch
Driver's door lock switch (LOCK/UNLOCK)
Driver's door key cylinder switch (LOCK/UNLOCK)
Keyless Entry System
The MICU controls the door lock actuators based on inputs of each switch.
Input Output
MICU IG1 power supply Driver's door lock actuator (UNLOCK)
Ignition key switch Door/Tailgate lock actuators (LOCK)
Driver's door switch Door/Tailgate lock actuators (UNLOCK)
Driver's door lock switch (LOCK/UNLOCK)
B-CAN Keyless door lock signal Relock message
Key Interlock (A/T)

The MICU controls the key interlock solenoid based on inputs from each switch.
Input Output
MICU Ignition switch (I) Key interlock solenoid
Transmission range switch (P) position
Park-pin switch
(cont'd)
Security Alarm System

The MICU controls the exterior lights and the horn based on inputs of each switch.
Input Output
Ignition key switch Parking lights
Audio switch Side marker lights
Tailgate latch switch Taillights
Driver's door switch Security horn
Driver's door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)
Front passenger's door lock knob switch
(UNLOCK)
Left rear door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)
Right rear door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)
Security hood switch
B-CAN Keyless door lock signal MICU (SET1) message
Door lock signal MICU (SET2) message
VALID CODE message ALARM (ACTION) message
Answer Back Response Operation

The MICU controls the lighting system and horn based on keyless signals sent by B-CAN.
Input Output
MICU Horn
Headlights (LO)
Taillights
Side marker lights
Parking lights
B-CAN Answer back (PARKING) signal
Answer back (HLLO) signal
Answer back (HORN) signal
Auto Door Lock
The MICU controls the door lock actuators based on inputs from each switch and B-CAN signals.
Input Output
MICU IG1 power supply Door/Tailgate lock actuators (LOCK)
(UNLOCK)
Transmission range switch (P) position (A/T)
B-CAN Vehicle speed signal
Engine speed signal
Auto Door Unlocks
The MICU controls the door lock actuators based on the inputs from each switch.
Input Output
MICU IG1 power supply Door/Tailgate lock actuators (UNLOCK)
Ignition key switch Driver's door lock actuator (UNLOCK)
(UNLOCK)
Transmission range switch (P) position
Keyless Panic Function

The MICU controls the keyless PANIC function based on Panic signals sent by B-CAN.
Input Output
MICU Headlights (LO)
Parking lights
Side marker lights
Taillights
Horn
B-CAN PANIC singals
(cont'd)
HDS Inputs and Function Tests

Certain inputs happen so quickly that the HDS cannot update fast enough. Hold the switch that is being tested while
monitoring the Data List. This should give the HDS time to update the signal on the Data List.
Because the HDS software is updated to support the release for newer vehicles, it is not uncommon to see system
function tests that are not supported.
Make sure that the most current HDS software is loaded.
Input
System Menu Data List Data List Indication
Lighting Driver's Door Switch OFF/ON
Hazard Warning Switch OFF/ON
Headlight Switch (OFF) OFF/ON
Headlight Switch (PARKING) OFF/ON
Headlight Switch (HEADLIGHT) OFF/ON
Headlight Switch (High Beam) OFF/ON
Headlight Switch (PASSING) OFF/ON
Turn Signal Switch (LEFT) OFF/ON
Turn Signal Switch (RIGHT) OFF/ON
Fog Light Switch OFF/ON
Left Turn Signal Command OFF/ON
Right Turn Signal Command OFF/ON
Cargo Light Command OFF/ON
Headlight Command OFF/ON
Headlight High Beam Command OFF/ON
Parking Light Command OFF/ON
Fog Light Command OFF/ON
DRL Command OFF/ON
Input
Gauges Cruise Control Main Switch (ACC switch) OFF/ON
Cruise Control Set Switch OFF/ON
Cruise Control Resume Switch OFF/ON
Washer Fluid Level Switch OFF/ON
Gauge Select/Reset Switch OFF/ON
VSA off Switch OFF/ON
Parking Brake Switch OFF/ON
Brake Fluid Level Switch OFF/ON
Fuel Sending Unit Input 1 V
Fuel Sending Unit Input 2 V
ABS Indicator OFF/ON
EBD Indicator (Electronic Brake Distribution) OFF/ON
Cruise Control Main Switch Indicator OFF/ON
MIL Indicator OFF/ON
VSA Off Indicator OFF/ON
VSA Indicator OFF/ON
DRL Indicator OFF/ON
Low Oil Pressure Indicator OFF/ON
Charging System Indicator OFF/ON
Maintenance Minder Indicator OFF/ON
High Beam Indicator OFF/ON
Parking Light ON Indicator OFF/ON
Low Fuel Warning Indicator OFF/ON
Security Indicator OFF/ON
Fog Light Indicator OFF/ON
Seatbelt Indicator OFF/ON
SRS Indicator OFF/ON
Speed Indicator (km/h) Command km/h/Fail
Speed Indicator (mph) Command mile/h/Fail
Driver's Seat Belt Buckle Switch OFF/ON
A/T Gear Position Switch (R) OFF/ON
A/T Gear Position Switch (P) OFF/ON
(cont'd)
Input
Door Locks Driver's Door Switch OFF/ON
Front Passenger's Door Switch OFF/ON
Driver's Rear Door Switch OFF/ON
Passenger's Rear Door Switch OFF/ON
Driver's Rear Door Lock Knob Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Passenger's Rear Door Lock Knob Sw. (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch (LOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Lock Switch (LOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Lock Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Lock Knob Switch (LOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Lock Knob Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Front Passenger's Door Lock Knob Sw. (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Door LOCK Command OFF/ON
Door UNLOCK Command OFF/ON
Wiper Brake Pedal Position Switch OFF/ON
Rear Wiper Auto Stop Switch ON/OFF
Windshield Wiper Switch (LOW) OFF/ON
Windshield Wiper Switch (HIGH) OFF/ON
Windshield Wiper Switch (MIST) OFF/ON
Rear Wiper Switch OFF/ON
Windshield Wiper Switch (INT) OFF/ON
Windshield Washer Switch OFF/ON
Rear Washer Switch OFF/ON
Windshield Wiper Motor PARK Switch OFF/ON
Rear Wiper Command OFF/ON
Rear Washer Command OFF/ON
Windshield Wiper Motor HI Command OFF/ON
Windshield Wiper Motor LO Command OFF/ON
Windshield Washer Motor Command OFF/ON
Keyless Driver's Door Switch OFF/ON
Transmitter Front Passenger's Door Switch OFF/ON
Trunk Knob Sw. (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Trunk Key Cylinder (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Trunk Handle Switch OFF/ON
Driver's Door LOCK Command OFF/ON
Trunk Lid Release Command OFF/ON
Input
Security Ignition Key Cylinder Switch OFF/ON
Driver's Door Switch OFF/ON
Front Passenger's Door Switch OFF/ON
Trunk Lid/Tailgate Switch OFF/ON
Trunk Knob Sw. (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Trunk Key Cylinder (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Trunk Handle Switch OFF/ON
Hazard warning switch OFF/ON
Security Hood Switch OFF/ON
Driver's Door UNLOCK Command (Individual) OFF/ON
Trunk Lid Release Command OFF/ON
Headlight Command OFF/ON
Headlight High Beam Command OFF/ON
Parking Light Command OFF/ON
Horn Command OFF/ON
HDS Inputs and Function Tests

Function Test
System Menu HDS Description Note
Door Locks LOCK all doors Outputs LOCK signal 1 time (for 0.6
seconds) to all door
UNLOCK driver's side door Outputs UNLOCK signal 1 time (for 0.6
seconds) to driver's side door
UNLOCK all doors Outputs UNLOCK signal 1 time (for 0.6
seconds) to all door
Lighting Interior Light Command Illuminates for 30 seconds
Left Turn Signal Command Blinks for 5 seconds
Right Turn Signal Command Blinks for 5 seconds
Hazard Flasher Blinks turn signal (left and right) for 15
seconds
Headlight Command Operates headlight (low) for 15 seconds
Headlight High Beam Command Operates headlight (high) for 15 seconds
Parking Lights Command Operates Parking Light for 15 seconds
Fog Light Operates fog light for 15 seconds
Cargo Area Light Illuminates for 30 seconds
Security Horn Command Operates horn for 1 second
Wiper Windshield Wiper Motor Low Command Operates windshield wiper for 5 seconds
(low speed)
Windshield Wiper Motor High Command Operates windshield wiper for 5 seconds
(high speed)
Windshield Washer Command Operates windshield washer for 5
seconds
Rear Wiper Motor Operates for 5 seconds
Rear Wiper Washer Operates for 5 seconds
Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A
Check the ECM/PCM for DTCs and troubleshoot 3. From the BODY ELECTRICAL menu, select B-CAN
ECM/PCM (see page 11-3) or F-CAN loss of CONTROL UNITS INFORMATION, and then select
communication errors first, then do this diagnosis if the CONNECTED UNIT listed to see if the following
symptom is related to the B-CAN system. control units are communicating with the HDS.
1. Compare the symptom with this list of B-CAN related • MICU
systems: • Gauge control module
• Gauge control module • Immobilizer-keyless control unit
• Exterior lights • HandsFreeLink control unit
• Entry light control NOTE:
• Horns (security and panic) • If a unit is communicating with the HDS, DETECT is
• Wiper/washer displayed.
• Security • If a unit is not communicating or the vehicle is not
• Keyless entry equipped, "Not Available" is displayed.
• Power door locks • The HDS only checks the connected units status
• Immobilizer one time when BODY ELECTRICAL is selected. To
recheck the status after repair, reboot the HDS and
• HandsFreeLink
repeat step 3.
Is the symptom related to the B-CAN system?
Are all control units communicating with the HDS?
YES-Go to step 2.
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Go to the system troubleshooting for the system
NO-lf any of the control units are not communicating,
with the symptom.■
go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode B (see
2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A), page 22-108). If all units are not communicating or
then turn the ignition switch to ON (II). only the MICU is communicating, go to DTC B1000
troubleshooting (see page 22-115).■
4. Select the system that has the problem from the
BODY ELECTRICAL menu, then select DTCs.
Are any DTCs indicated?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-lf the problem is related to one of the following
items, and the system that is malfunctioning dose not
stop or turn off, go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test
Mode C (see page 22-109) If the problem is related to
one of the following items and the system that is
malfunctioning does not work or turn on, go to B-CAN
System Diagnosis Test Mode D (see page 22-110)
• Exterior lights
• Entry light control
• Horns (security and panic)
• Wiper/washer
If the problem is related to one of the following items,
go to the troubleshooting for that individual
system.■
• Gauge control module
• Security
• Keyless entry
• HandsFreeLink
Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Troubleshooting - B-CAN System
Diagnosis Test Mode A (cont'd) Diagnosis Test Mode B
5. Record all DTCs, and sort them by DTC type. Do this diagnosis if any of the control units are not
communicating (Not Available is displayed on the HDS)
6. Troubleshoot the DTC(s) in this order:
as found by the B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A
• Battery voltage DTCs. (see page 22-107).
• Internal error DTCs. 1. Using the HDS, select the system that has the
• Loss of communication DTCs. symptom from the BODY ELECTRICAL menu.
• Signal error DTCs. 2. Select the DTCs, and then check for loss of
communication DTCs.
Are any loss of communication DTCs indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
IMO-Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/relay
box.H
• USA models (see page 22-65)
• Canada models (see page 22-66)
3. Do the power, ground, and communication part of the
input test for the unit(s) not communicating with the
HDS.
Unit not communicating_____

MICU (see page 22-120)
Gauge control module (see page 22-290)
Immobilizer-keyless control unit (see page
22-332)______ ;______________________ _
HandsFreeLink control unit _____ __
Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode C
Do this diagnosis if a component that is controlled by the 5. Check the relay that does not stop or turn off, if
B-CAN system does not stop or turn off. applicable, then check for a short in the wire between
the relay and the component, the relay and control
NOTE:
unit, or the component and control unit.
• If the component does not turn on, go to B-CAN
System Diagnosis Test Mode D (see page 22-110). Are the relay and the wire harness OK?
• See the B-CAN system unit input/output index for a list
YES-Replace the control unit that controls the
of input and output devices and the control units that
component that will not turn OFF.B
monitor the input and controls the output devices (see
page 22-92). NO-Replace the relay or repair the wire harness.!
• Always cycle the ignition switch within 3 seconds 6. Check the switch, then check for a short in the wire
when prompted in the DTC troubleshooting between the switch and the control unit that monitors
procedures in this section. the switch.
1. Check for DTCs by selecting the MODE MENU from Are the switch and wire harness OK?
the HDS.
YES-Replace the control unit that monitors the
Are any DTCs indicated?
sw itch.!
YES-Go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A NO-Replace the switch, or repair the wire harness.®
(see page 22-107).B
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Turn off the switch that controls the malfunctioning
component
3. Select the applicable system from the system MODE
MENU, then select DATA LIST, and check the input of
the switch that controls the component.
Does the HDS indicate the switch is OFF?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Go to step 6.
4. In the DATA LIST, check the output signal of the
malfunctioning component.
Is the output signal OFF?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Replace the control unit that controls the device
that will not turn OFF.H
Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode D
Do this diagnosis if a component that is controlled by the 7. With the malfunctioning output device connected,
B-CAN system does not work or come on. connect a voltmeter between the malfunctioning
output device input and the ground wire that the
NOTE: control unit uses to control the output device circuit.
• If the component does not turn off or stop, go to
B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode C (see page 8. Select FUNCUTIONAL TEST from the MODE MENU,
22-109). and do the forced operation test of the malfunctioning
• See the B-CAN system unit input/output index for a list component
of input and output devices and the control units that Is there a change in voltage (12 Vt oOVor OVt o 12 V)?
monitor the input and controls the output devices (see
page 22-92). YES-Replace the c om ponent!
1. Check the fuse of the malfunctioning output device. NO-Replace the control unit that controls the
malfunctioning com ponent!
Is the fuse OK?
9. Select DATA LIST from the system MODE MENU, and
YES-Go to step 2. make sure the switch signal input for the
NO-Replace the fuse. If the fuse blows again, repair a malfunctioning system indicates a change when
short to ground on the fuse circuit of the operated.
malfunctioning device.! Does the switch input indicated ON when the switch is
2. Check for DTCs by selecting the MODE MENU from ON?
the HDS. YES-Replace the control unit that controls the
Are any DTCs indicated ? malfunctioning com ponent!
YES-Go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A NO-Go to step 10.

(see page 22-107).! 10. Check the switch and its ground (if applicable), then
NO-Go to step 3. check for an open or a short in the wire between the
switch and the control unit that monitors it.
3. Turn ON the switch that controls the malfunctioning
component. Is the switch and the wire harness OK?
4. Select the applicable system from the system MODE YES-Replace the control unit that monitors the
MENU, then select DATA LIST, and check output switch.!
signal for the malfunctioning component. NO-Replace the switch, or repair the wire harness.!
Is there an output signal?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 9.
5. Check the relay and ground, then check for an open or
a short in the circuit for the malfunctioning
component.
Are the relay and circuit OK?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Replace the relay or repair the wire circuit.!
6. Do the function test for the malfunctioning
component
Does the output device pass the function test?
YES-Go to step 7.
Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode 1 and Test Mode 2
(without the HDS)
Special Tools Requi red 6. Check for B-CAN DTCs indicated by the odo/trip LCD
MPCS (MCIS) Service Connector 07WAZ-001010A display on the gauge control module while still in Test
Mode 1. Push the odometer SELET/RESET button to
Test Mode 1 display the next code. After you get to the last code,
the display shows END. If no DTCs are stored, the
Check the ECM/PCM for DTCs and troubleshoot display will read NO. (see page 22-88)
ECM/PCM (see page 11-3) or F-CAN loss of
communication errors first, then do this diagnosis if the NOTE; If the test times out, remove the MPCS service
HDS is not available. connector, turn the ignition switch to LOCK(O), and
repeat step 3 and 4.
1. Check the No. 1 (10 A) and the No. 22 (7.5 A) fuses in
the under-dash fuse/relay box. Are any DTCs indicated?
Are the fuses OK? YES-Go to step 7.
YES-Go to step 2. NO-Go to step 9.
NO-Replace the fuses. If the fuse blows again, repair 7. Record all DTCs and troubleshoot them in this order:
the short to ground on the fuse circuit(s).l • Battery voltage DTCs
• Internal error DTCs
• Loss of communication DTCs
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and move the • Signal error DTCs
ceiling light switch to the middle (DOOR) position.
8. Clear the DTCs by pressing and holding the
4. Connect the MPCS service connector (A) to the SELECT/RESET button for about 10 seconds.
multiplex control inspection connector socket (B) in
the under-dash fuse/relay box. 9. You will hear a beep to confirm the codes have been
cleared. Operate the devices that failed, and recheck
for codes.
Test Mode 2
10. Remove the MPCS service connector from the
under-dash fuse/relay box multiplex control
inspection connector socket for 5—10 seconds, then
re-insert it to enter Mode 2. When the system enters
Mode 2, the ceiling light will flash two times quickly
and then go off.
NOTE: If the MPCS service connector is disconnected
for too short or too long of a time, or the ignition
switch is turned to LOCK (0), the system will return to
Test Mode 1.
5. Wait 5 seconds, and watch the ceiling light. When the 11. The following table lists the circuits that can be
ceiling light flashes quickly once and then goes off, checked in Test Mode 2. Operate the switch that is
the system is in Test Mode 1. most closely related to the problem. If the circuit is
OK, the ceiling light blink once. If the circuit is faulty,
there is no indication.
(cont'd)
Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode 1 and Test Mode 2
(without the HDS) (cont'd)
M ICU Does the ceiling light work properly in all switch
positions?
__________ Item
Brake pedal position switch (ON) _______ YES-Go to function and input test for the system
Driver's door switch______________________ related to the failu re.!
Left rear door switch_______ ______________
NO-Repair the open, or short, or replace the faulty
Tailgate latch switch ________ ,
switch.!
Fog light switch__________________________
Windshield wiper switch (LOW)____________
Windshield wiper switch (HIGH) ________
Windshield wiper switch (INT)_____
Windshield wiper switch (MIST)____________
Rear wiper switch________________________
Windshield washer switch_________________
Wiper intermittent dwell time controller
Turn signal switch (LEFT)__________________
Turn signal switch (RIGHT) _____
Hazard warning switch (ON)_____
Headlight switch (OFF)____________________
Headlight switch (PARKING)_______________
Headlight switch (HEADLIGHT)_____________
Headlight switch (High Beam)____________ _
Headlight switch (PASSING)... ........ ..................
Trunk lid opener main switch______________
Trunk lid outer handle switch ________
A/C pressure switch _____________
Transmission range switch (P) (A/T)_____
Ignition key cylinder switch________________
Security hood switch_____ __________ _______ _
Back-up light switch______^ ________________
Windshield wiper motor PARK switch
Right rear door switch____________________
Audio unit or Audio-navigation unit connected
Driver's door lock switch (UNLOCK)_________
Driver's door lock switch (LOCK)
Driver's door lock knob switch (LOCK)_______
Driver's door lock key cylinder switch
(UNLOCK)*_______
Driver's door lock key cylinder switch (LOCK)*
(UNLOCK)_____________________
* A second key is necessary to check the key
cylinder inputs. Be sure to rotate the key cylinder
switch two times to each position (lock and lock,
unlock and unlock) to ensure the door lock knob
switch is in the appropriate position.
Sleep and Wake-Up Mode Test
1. Shift to the sleep mode:

Close all doors. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and remove the key, then open and close the driver's door. If the
MICU receives no signals from the inputs listed below, it will go into sleep mode in less than 40 seconds.
2. Confirm the sleep mode:
NOTE: Check any official Honda service website for more service information about parasitic draw at the battery.
Check the parasitic draw at the battery after 40 seconds; amperage should change to less than 30 mA in less than 40
seconds.
3. Shift to the wake up mode:
When the ignition switch is turned to ON (II), the MICU, gauge control module, im mo bi Iizer-key Iess control unit, and
ECM/PCM wake up at the same time without "talking" to each other through the communication lines. When any
switch in the multiplex integrated control system is turned on, it wakes up its related control unit which, in turn, wakes
up the other units. After confirming the sleep mode, look in the following table for the switch most related to the
problem. Operate that switch and see if its control unit wakes up.
NOTE: If any control unit is faulty and will not wake up, several circuits in the system will malfunction at the same
time. Below is a list of the switches and the input signals that wake them up.
• Driver's door switch (door open)
• Left rear door switch (door open)
• Tailgate latch switch (Tailgate open)
• Left rear door lock knob switch
• Hood switch (hood open)
• Hazard warning switch (ON)
• Combination light switch (Parking, Headlight, Dimmer, Passing ON)
• Ignition key switch (key inserted)
• Driver's door key cylinder switch (LOCK/UNLOCK)
• Passenger's rear door lock knob (UNLOCK)
• Front passenger's door lock knob (UNLOCK)
• Driver's door lock switch (LOCK/UNLOCK)
• Front passenger's door switch (door open)
• Passenger's rear door switch (door open)
Circuit Diagram
*1 : '09-10 models and '11-12 models (M/T)

*2:'11-12 models (A/T)
*3 : Without navigation
- - : B-CAN line
BATTERY TERMINAL ; Other communication line
FUSE BOX UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
DTC Troubleshooting
D TC B 1 0 0 0 ; C o m m u n i c a t i o n circu it erro r ( B U S 9. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector Q

(16P).
O ff)
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTC's, be sure
box connector Q (16P) terminal No. 3 and body
to follow the instruction in B-CAN System Diagnosis
ground.
Test Mode A (see page 22-107).
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR Q (16P)
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to
B-CAN (LT GRN)
ON (II).
ri_ pi F
3. Wait for at least 6 seconds. 1 2 3 4 5 6 8

4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. 9 10 11 / 13 14 / 16
Is DTC B1000 indicated?

YES-Go to step 5.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Wire side of female termina l s
Check for loose or poor connections, or worn/shorted
wires. If the connections are good, check the battery
condition (see page 22-68) and the charging Is there continuity?
system .!
YES-Repair a short to ground in the w ire .!
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
NO-Go to step 11.
6. Disconnect the appropriate connector at each control
unit in the table one at a time. Clear the DTC, then
recheck for DTCs after each unit is disconnected. 12. Measure the voltage between under-dash fuse/relay
box connector Q (16P) terminal No. 3 and body
Control Unit Connector ground.
Gauge control module 32P connector
Immobilizer-keyless 7P connector
control unit UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR Q (16P)
HandsFreeLink control 28P connector
unit B-CAN (LT GRIM)
n_ _ji_ p
Is DTC B1000 indicated with each individual unit
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
disconnected?
9 10 11 / 13 14 / 16
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to the input test for the control unit that was
disconnected when DTC B1000 did not reset and
X
perform all power and ground input tests. If the tests
prove OK, replace that u n it.! Wire side of female termina l s
• Gauge control unit input test (see page 22-290)
• Immobilizer-keyless control unit input test (see Is there voltage?
page 22-332)
YES-Repair a short to power in the wire between the
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). under-dash fuse/relay box and the affected control
8. Disconnect each control unit connector in the table. u n it!
NO-Faulty MICU, replace the under-dash fuse/relay
Control Unit Connector
b o x .!
Gauge control module 32P connector
Immobilizer-keyless 7P connector • USA models (see page 22-65)
control unit • Canada models (see page 22-66)
HandsFreeLink control 28P connector
unit
(cont'd)
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
DTC B1002: MICU internal error (EEPROM D TC B 1 0 1 1 : M ICU lo s t c o m m u n i c a t i o n w ith

error) G a u g e C on trol M o d u le (V SP /N E m e s s a g e )
NOTE; If you are troubleshooting multiple DTC's, be sure NOTE;

to follow the instruction in B-CAN System Diagnosis • If you are troubleshooting multiple DTC's, be sure to
Test Mode A (see page 22-107). follow the instruction in B-CAN System Diagnosis Test
Mode A (see page 22-107).
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
• Before troubleshooting, check the No. 1 (10 A) and No.
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to 22 (7.5 A) fuses in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
ON (II).
Is DTC B1002 indicated? ON (II).
YES-Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/relay 3. Wait for at least 6 seconds.
box.H
• Canada models (see page 22-66) Is DTCs B1011 indicated?
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. YES-Go to step 5.
Check for loose or poor connections. If the
connections are good, check the battery condition
Check for loose or poor connections between the
(see page 22-68) and the charging system.■
gauge control module and under-dash fuse/relay box
connector Q (16P). If the connections are good, check
the battery condition (see page 22-68) and the
charging system.®
5. Measure the voltage between gauge control module
32P connector terminals No. 16 and No. 32 and body
ground individually.
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 32P CONNECTOR
VBU (PNK)
]17|18 | 19|20|21|22|23|24|25 |/1 2 T |2 8 |2 9 I3 0 |/|3 2

IG1 (LT BLU)
W ir e s id e o f f e m a l e te rm in a ls
Is there battery voltage?

YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Repair open or high resistance in the wire.l
6. Measure the voltage between gauge control module DTC B1036: IG1 P o w e r s u p p l y C i r c u i t
M alfu n ctio n
ground individually.
NOTE:
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 32P CONNECTOR • If you are troubleshooting multiple DTC's, be sure to
follow the instruction in B-CAN System Diagnosis Test
S-GND (BLK) Mode A (see page 22-107).
• Before troubleshooting, make sure the No. 22 (7.5 A)
’i T ^ W I e / i / b k / M > 3 | / | / | i 6| fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box is OK.
|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24|25|/|27|28|29|30|/|32
P-GND (BLK)
ON (II).
3. Wait for at least 6 seconds.
Wire side of female terminals
Is there less than 0.2 V? Is DTC B1036 indicated?
YES-Go to step 7. YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Repair an open or high resistance in the ground NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
wire or poor ground (G501 ) . ■ Check for loose or poor connection at the gauge
control module 32P connector, and at under-dash
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). fuse/relay box connector Q (16P). If the connections
8. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector Q are good, check the battery condition (see page 22-68)
(16P). and the charging system.■
9. Disconnect the gauge control module 32P connector. 5. Measure the voltage between the gauge control
module 32P connector terminal No. 32 and body
10. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay ground.
box connector Q (16P) terminal No. 3 and gauge
control module 32P connector terminal No. 18.
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR Q (16P)
Wire side offemale terminals
B-CAN (LT GRN)
iM / l/l /le / l / l 9 |/ 7 P W 0 i e f
1_ r n |17|18 | 19|20 | 21| 22|23 | 24 | 2 5 | / | 2 7 | 28|29 | 3 0 | /| 3 2
1 2 3 4 .5 6 z 8 IG1 (LT BLU)
9 10 11 / 13 14 / 16
X
T I7 h 3 |/T 7 li5 | f
|17|18|19|20 | 21|22| 23 | 24| 2 5 |/|2 7 |2 8 | 2 9 |3 0 |/|3 2
Wire side of fema l e terminal s

B-CAN (LT GRN)
Wire side of female terminal s
Is there continuity? YES-Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/relay

box.H
YES-Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/relay • USA models (see page 22-65)
b o x .l
NO-Repair open or high resistance in the wire
between the under-dash fuse/relay box and the gauge
between the under-dash fuse/relay box and the gauge
control module.®
control m o du le.!
(cont'd)
DTC B1150: Communication circuit error (BUS DTC B1900: Communication circuit error (BUS
Off) Off)
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure
to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis
Test Mode A (see page 22-107). Test Mode A (see page 22-107).
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to
ON (II). ON (II).
3. Wait for at least 6 seconds. 3. Wait for at least 6 seconds.
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC B1150 indicated? Is DTC B1900 indicated?
YES-Troubleshoot DTC B1000 (see page 22-115).H YES-Troubleshoot DTC B1000 (see page 22-115).H
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time.H time.B
DTC U1280: Communication bus Line Error
(BUS-OFF)
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure
to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis
ON (II).
Is DTC U1280 indicated?
YES-Troubleshoot DTC B1000 (see page 22-115).H
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time.B
MICU Input Test

3. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connectors K, M, N, and Q,
NOTE: All connector views are wire side of female terminals.
CONNECTOR K(10P) CONNECTOR M (34P)

BLK
1_ p
1 2 i— , 3 /
5 6 7 8 10
b— / b-TJ
RED BLK
CONNECTOR N (8P) CONNECTOR Q(16P)
BLK BLU LT GRN LT BLU
PNK /
_r n__:pH-l n
NJ 1 i— » 2 3 1 2 3 4 6 / 8
[j—
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 13 14 / 16
----L /
BLK
4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
• If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary and recheck the system.
• If the terminals look OK, go to step 5.
5. With the connectors still disconnected, do these input tests at the following connectors.
• If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
• If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 6.
Cavity Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if desired result is
not obtained
Q2 BLU Under all conditions Check for continuity between An open or high resistance in the
terminal Q2 and the data link wire
connector 16P connector
terminal No. 7:
There should be continuity.
Q3 LT Immobilizer-keyless Check for continuity between An open or high resistance in the
GRN control unit 7P terminal Q3 and the wire
connector immobilizer-keyless control unit
disconnected 7P connector terminal No. 4:
Q3 LT Gauge control Check for continuity between An open or high resistance in the
GRN module 32P terminal Q3 and the gauge wire
connector control module 32P connector
disconnected terminal No. 18:There should be
continuity.
03* LT HandsFreeLink Check for continuity between An open or high resistance in the
GRN control unit 28P terminal Q3 and the wire
connector HandsFreeLink control unit 28P
disconnected connector terminal No. 18:
*: '12 model without navigation
6. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box, turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and do these input tests
at the following connectors.
NOTE: These are power and ground tests for the multiplex integrated control unit
not obtained
N1 PNK Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 1 (10 A) fuse in the
There should be battery voltage. under-dash fuse/relay box
• Faulty driver's under-dash
fuse/relay box
• An open or high resistance in
the wire
08 LT Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 22 (7.5 A) fuse in the
BLU There should be battery voltage. under- dash fuse/relay box
• Faulty under-dash fuse/relay
box
the wire
K10 BLK In all ignition switch Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G502) or an open
positions There should be less than 0.2 V. in the ground wire
the wire
M16 BLK In all ignition switch Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G501) or an open
the wire
N2 BLK In all ignition switch Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G501) or an open
the wire
09 BLK In all ignition switch Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G502) or an open
the wire
7. If multiple failures are found on more than one control unit, replace the under-dash fuse/relay box (includes the
MICU).
If input failures are related to a particular control unit, replace the control unit
Actuator Test, page 22-163

Knob Switch Test, page 22-165
*: With security
*: With security
System Description
Security Alarm When the system sounds the alarm, the horn sounds
and the exterior lights flash for 2 minutes. The alarm can
The security alarm system automatically arms after the be stopped at any time by unlocking the driver's door by
doors, hood, and tailgate are closed and locked. For the pressing any button on the transmitter.
system to arm, the ignition switch must be in the LOCK
(0), the key must be removed from the ignition switch, Keyless Entry System
and the MICU must receive inputs that the doors, hood,
The keyless entry system is integrated with the multiplex
and tailgate are closed and locked. The alarm can be
integrated control system. The multiplex integrated
disarmed at any time by unlocking the driver door with
control unit (MICU) receives LOCK, UNLOCK, and PANIC
the key or pressing the UNLOCK button on the
signals from the immobilizer-keyless control unit
transmitter.
(keyless receiver).
When everything is closed and locked, the only inputs
The keyless entry system allows you to lock and unlock
that are grounded, and have 0 V, are the driver's door
the vehicle with the transmitter. When you press the
lock knob switch (LOCK position) input and the audio
LOCK button, all doors lock. When you press the
unit or audio-navigation unit (if equipped) security input
UNLOCK button once, only the driver's door unlocks.
In other words, all of the other switches are open, and
The other doors will unlock when you press the button a
have about 10 to 12 V, including the key cylinder
second time. The doors will not lock with the transmitter
switches. The security indicator in the gauge control
if a door is not fully closed, or if the key is in the ignition
module begins to flash immediately after the vehicle is
switch.
completely closed and locked, and 15 seconds later, the
security system arms. If the security indicator does not When the switch for the ceiling light is in the middle
flash after the doors are locked, the system is not (DOOR) position, it comes on when the UNLOCK button
arming. is pressed. If a door is not opened, the light goes off and
the doors will relock in about 30 seconds. If the doors are
If one of the switches is misadjusted or shorted
locked with the transmitter within 30 seconds, the light
internally, or there is a short in one of the keyless/power
goes off immediately.
door lock/security circuit, the security system will not
arm. A switch that is slightly misadjusted can cause the Panic Mode
alarm to sound for no apparent reason. In this case, a
significant change in outside air temperature, the The panic mode sounds the alarm in order to attract
vibration of a passing truck, or someone bumping into attention. When the PANIC button on the transmitter is
the vehicle could cause the alarm to sound. pressed and held for 2 seconds, the horns sound and the
exterior lights flash for about 20 seconds.
NOTE: There is no glass breakage or motion detection
feature. The panic mode can be cancelled at anytime by pressing
any button on the transmitter or by turning the ignition
The system sounds the alarm when any of these occur: switch to ON (II). The panic mode will not function if the
• A door or the tailgate is forced open. ignition switch is in ON (II).
• A door is unlocked without using the key or the
transmitter.
• The hood is opened.
• The audio unit or navigation unit (if equipped) is
disconnected.
• The transmitter PANIC button is pressed.
Circuit Diagram
BATTERY TERMINAL
FUSE BOX IGNITION SWITCH UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
No. 1 (100 A) No. 20 (15 A)

— cr\jc^—
<£>- IGy
IG1 HOT in ON (II) No. 60
and START (III) f1 (IGN) (BOA)
------------------------ WHT — -c ru > i
No. 1 (10 A)
-c r \jo — -PN K-
) No. 22 ) No. 27
,(7.5 A) , (30 A)
+B DOOR
IG1 LOCK
(MAIN)
PG SG MICU
K10 E2 E9
DOOR
BLK BLK BLK BLK GRY LT BLU GRN PUR LOCK BRN RED
DRIVER'S DOOR LATCH
DLfx
J l.- 0 - jC L - L L 1
G501 G502 G502 G501
*1 : '09-10 models
*2: '11 model
*3 : If one of fuses brown, check
another fuse in the same circuit.
--------- --------- : B-CAN line
GAUGE CONTROL
MODULE
(cont'd)
Circuit Diagram (cont'd)
No. 3 (20 A) FUSE

(BATTERY TERMINAL
FUSE BOX)
(With security)
UNDER-DASH
(With security)
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC B1127: Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch 10. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector E
(12P).
M alfunction
NOTE;
box connector E (12P) terminals No. 4 (UNLOCK) and
• If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to No. 3 (LOCK) and body ground individually.
follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR E (12P)
• You will need two keys to do this troubleshooting.
LOCK (PUR) UNLOCK (GRN)
«_ _n_
ON (II). 1 2 3 4 5 6
3. Insert the ignition key into the driver's door key / 8 9 / / /
cylinder, and turn the key to the LOCK and UNLOCK
positions at least 10 times.
Wire side of female termina l s
YES-Go to step 5. Is there continuity?
NO-lntermittent failure, the driver's door key cylinder YES-Repair short to ground in the LOCK or UNLOCK
switch system is OK at this time. Check for loose or w ir e .l
poor connections.■
NO-Go to step 15.
5. With the driver's door key cylinder in the neutral
position, select KEYLESS with the HDS, and enter the 12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
DATA LIST. 13. Disconnect the driver's door lock actuator 10P
6. Check the ON/OFF information of the DRIVER'S DOOR connector.
KEY CYLINDER SWITCH (LOCK) and DRIVER'S DOOR 14. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector E
KEY CYLINDER SWITCH (UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST. (12P).
Are both information indicators OFF?
YES-The MICU is faulty. Replace the under-dash
fuse/relay box.B
NO-Go to step 7.
7. Disconnect the driver's door lock actuator 10P
connector.
8. Check the ON/OFF information of the DRIVER'S DOOR
KEY CYLINDER SWITCH (LOCK) and DRIVER'S DOOR
KEY CYLINDER SWITCH (UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST.
YES-Faulty driver's door key cylinder switch; replace
the driver's door lock actuator.H
NO-Go to step 9.
15. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay DTC B 1 1 2 8 : D river's d o o r r e m o t e s w it c h in p u t
C ircu it M a l f u n c t i o n ( S i m u l t a n e o u s in p u t o f
No. 3 (LOCK).
lo c k a n d u n lo c k s ig n a l)
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR E (12P) NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTC's, be sure
LOCK (PUR) UNLOCK (GRN)
—Jl— _n_
1 2 3 4 5 6 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to
/ 8 9/ / / ON (II).
3. Lock and unlock the driver's door several times with
the driver's door lock switch.
Is there continuity? YES-Go to step 5.
YES-Repair short in the wire between the LOCK and NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
UNLOCK w ires .* Check for loose or poor connections.®
NO-Faulty MICU, replace the under-dash fuse/relay 5. With the driver's door lock switch in the neutral
box.B position, select KEYLESS from the HDS and enter the
• USA models (see page 22-65) DATA LIST.
LOCK SWITCH (LOCK) and DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK
SWITCH (UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST.
YES-The MICU is faulty. Replace the under-dash
fuse/relay box.B
NO-Go to step 7.
7. Disconnect the power window master switch
connector.
LOCK SWITCH (LOCK) and DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK
SWITCH (UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST.
YES-Faulty door lock switch; replace the power
window master switch.■
NO-Go to step 9.
10. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector E
(12P).
(cont'd)
11. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay 15. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay
box connector E (12P) terminals No. 8 (LOCK) and box connector E (12P) terminals No. 8 (LOCK) and
No. 1 (UNLOCK) and body ground individually. No. 1 (UNLOCK).
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR E (12P) UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR E (12P)
UNLOCK (GRY)
__n_. fi UNLOCK (GRY)
1 2 3 4 5 6 n i ........I .n.
1 2 3 4 5 6
/ 8 9 / / /
LOCK (LT BLU) / 8 9 / / /
LOCK (LT BLU)
(g ) <g)
Wire side offemale terminals Wire si de of female terminals
Is there continuity? Is there continuity?

YES-Repair short to ground in the LOCK or UNLOCK YES-Repair short in the wire between the LOCK and
wire.B UNLOCK wires.B
NO-Go to step 15. NO-Faulty MICU, replace the under-dash fuse/relay
box.B
13. Disconnect the power window master switch • Canada models (see page 22-66)
connector.
14. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector E
(12P).
DTC B1129: Driver's door knob switch input 7. Disconnect the driver's door lock actuator 10Pi
connector.
Circuit Malfunction (Simultaneous input of
lock and unlock signal) 8. Check the ON/OFF information of the DRIVER'S DOOR
LOCK KNOB SWITCH (LOCK) and DRIVER'S DOOR
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTC's, be sure LOCK KNOB SWITCH (UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST.
Test Mode A (see page 22-107). Are both information indicators OFF?
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. YES-Check for an open in the driver's door lock knob
switch (LOCK) wire or the driver's door lock knob
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to switch (UNLOCK) wire between the MICU and the
ON (II). driver's door lock knob switch. If OK, replace the
3. Operate the driver's door lock knob switch several driver's door lock actuator.!
times. NO-Go to step 9.
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. 9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Is DTC B 1129 indicated? 10. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector E
YES-Go to step 5. (12P).
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. 11. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay
Check for loose or poor connections.® box connector E (12P) terminals No. 2 (UNLOCK) and
No. 9 (LOCK) and body ground individually.
5. Select KEYLESS from the BODY ELECTRICAL menu,
and enter the DATA LIST.
LOCK KNOB SWITCH (LOCK) and the DRIVER'S
UNLOCK (BRN)
DOOR LOCK KNOB SWITCH (UNLOCK). —TL- —ji —
1 2 3 4 5 6
Are the DRIVERS DOOR LOCK KNOB SWITCH (LOCK)
information indicator ON and the DRIVER'S DOOR / 8 9 / / /
LOCK KNOB SWITCH (UNLOCK) information indicator
OFF with the driver's door lock knob switch in LOCK
position, and are the DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK KNOB
SWITCH (LOCK) information indicator OFF and the
DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK KNOB SWITCH (UNLOCK) Wire side of female terminals
information indicator ON with the driver's door lock knob
switch in UNLOCK position?
YES-Faulty MICU, replace the under-dash fuse/relay
YES-Repair short to ground in the LOCK or UNLOCK
boxM
w ir e .l
• Canada models (see page 22-66) NO-Go to step 12.
NO-Go to step 7.
(cont'd)

No. 9 (LOCK).
UNLOCK (BRN)
PI -IL.
1 2 3 4 5 6
/ 8 9 / / /
LOCK (RED)
YES-Repair short in the wire between the LOCK wire
and UNLOCK wire.B
box.H
Symptom Troubleshooting Index
Power Door Locks/Keyless

1. Check for B-CAN DTCs. If any B-CAN DTCs are indicated, refer to the B-CAN system diagnosis troubleshooting (see
page 22-87), and troubleshoot the indicated DTC(s) first.
2. If the door lock system and the keyless operation do not work, troubleshoot the door locks first.
NOTE: The system does not function when the ignition switch is ON (II).
Symptom Check Items Also check for

The security system sounds randomly Tripped sensor history (see page 22-170)
while the doors are locked.
All the doors will not lock or unlock.* • Poor ground (G501, G502, G602)
• Driver's door key cylinder switch test (see page
22-166)
• Door switch test (check the door switch ON/OFF
information with the HDS)
• Door lock switch test (check the door switch
ON/OFF information with the HDS)
Driver's and left rear doors will not lock • Poor ground (G501, G502)
or unlock. • Blown No. 27 (30 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/
relay box
• Blown No. 36 (15 A) and/or No. 50 (15A) fuse in the
under-dash fuse/relay box
• MICU input test (see page 22-156)
Front passenger's and right rear doors, • Poor ground (G501, G502)
and tailgate will not lock or unlock. • Blown No. 27 (30 A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box
• Blown No. 35 (15 A) and/or No. 49 (15 A) fuse in the
• MICU input test (see page 22-156)
Keyless operation does not work Symptom troubleshooting (see page 22-136)
(LOCK, UNLOCK, PANIC).
Doors automatically relock 30 seconds Symptom troubleshooting (see page 22-136)
after being unlocked with the
transmitter even though a door has
been opened.
Only driver's door will unlock or door Driver's door lock knob switch test (see page 22-164)
locks relock immediately after
unlocking with the remote.
Keyless operation will work even Ignition key switch test (see page 22-228)
though the ignition key is in the ignition
switch.
The horn does not sound when PANIC Symptom troubleshooting (see page 22-137)
button on the transmitter pressed.
Security alarm system will not arm Symptom troubleshooting (see page 22-138)
*: If only one door is not working properly, check that door's lock actuator first, then check the other items
listed in this table.
Symptom Troubleshooting
Doors automatically relock 30 seconds after Keyless operation does not work (LOCK,
being unlocked with the transmitter even UNLOCK, PANIC)
though a door has been opened NOTE:
NOTE: Before troubleshooting, check the B-CAN DTCs. If • If the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons work OK, but the
any DTC is indicated, refer to the B-CAN System PANIC button does not, see the troubleshooting for
Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-107), and The horn does not sound and/or the headlights do not
troubleshoot the indicated DTCs first. flash when the PANIC button on the transmitter is
pressed (see page 22-137).
1. Move the ceiling light switch in the DOOR position.
• Before troubleshooting, check the B-CAN DTCs. If any
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). DTC is indicated, refer to the B-CAN System Diagnosis
Test Mode A (see page 22-107), and troubleshoot the
3. Watch the ceiling light and the door indicators on the indicated DTCs first.
gauge control module.
1. Insert the key into the ignition switch, but leave the
Do the ceiling light and door indicators come on when switch in LOCK (0).
the door is open, and go off when the door is closed?
2. Open the driver's door, and listen for the key-in
YES-Substitute a known-good under-dash fuse/relay reminder beeper.
box and recheck. If the symptom goes away, replace
the original under-dash fuse/relay box.H Does the beeper sound?
NO-Check for an open or high resistance in the wire YES-Go to step 3.
between the MICU and each door switch. If the wire is
NO-Test the ignition key-in reminder circuit, and
OK, replace the door switch.■
recheck.
4. Try to start the engine.
Does the engine start?
YES-The immobilizer system is OK, Go to step 5.
NO-Go to the immobilizer symptom
troubleshooting.■ (see page 22-325)
6. Do the transmitter test (see page 22-167).
Is the transmitter OK?
YES-Replace the immobilizer-keyless control unit
(see page 22-336).H
NO-Replace the transmitter.*
Doors will not unlock (or lock) with the The horn does not sound and/or the
transmitter, but will unlock (or lock) with the headlights do not flash when the PANIC
door lock switch and the door key cylinder button on the transm itter is pressed
switch NOTE: Before troubleshooting, check the B-CAN DTCs. If
NOTE: Before troubleshooting, check the B-CAN DTCs. If any DTC is indicated, refer to the B-CAN System
any DTC is indicated, refer to the B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-107), and
Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-107), and troubleshoot the indicated DTCs first.
troubleshoot the indicated DTCs first. 1. Press the PANIC button.
1.Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Do the horns sound?
2. Remove the ignition key from the ignition switch. YES-Go to step 3.
3. Close and lock the doors. NO-Go to step 2.
4. Try to lock/unlock the doors with the keyless 2. Press the horn button.
transmitter.
Do the horns sound?
Do the door lock actuators work normally?
YES-Go to step 3.
YES-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Check for loose or poor connections.* NO-Do the horn switch test (see page 22-175).*
NO-Go to step 5. 3. Turn the headlight switch ON.

5. Open the driver's door. Do the headlights come on?
Does the key-in reminder beeper sound? YES-Go to step 4.
YES-Faulty ignition key switch, or a short to ground NO-Check the lighting circuit (see page 22-182).*
on the ignition switch wire. Repair the wire as
4. Do the transmitter test (see page 22-167).
needed.*
Is the transmitter OK?
NO-Go to step 6.
YES-Substitute a known-good immobilizer-keyless
6. Do the transmitter test, (see page 22-167)
control unit (see page 22-336) and recheck. If there is
Is the transmitter OK? still a problem, substitute a known-good under-dash
fuse/relay box (see page 22-65) and recheck. If the
YES-Substitute a known-good immobilizer-keyless problem goes away, replace the original
control unit, and recheck. If the problem goes away, immobilizer-keyless control unit (see page 22-336) or
replace the original immobilizer-keyless control unit under-dash fuse/relay box (see page 22-65).*
(see page 22-336).*
(cont'd)
Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd)
Security alarm system will not arm Tailgate latch switch circuit troubleshooting
NOTE: Before troubleshooting, check the B-CAN DTCs. If 1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
any DTC is indicated, refer to the B-CAN System Diagnosis
Test Mode A (see page 22-107), and troubleshoot the 2. With the tailgate closed, select SECURITY with the
indicated DTCs first. HDS, and enter the DATA LIST.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 3. Check the ON/OFF information of the TRUNK LID/TAIL
GATE SWITCH in the DATA LIST.
2. Select SECURITY from the BODY ELECTRICAL menu,
and enter the DATA LIST with the HDS. Is the data list value indicated ON?
3. Check the ON/OFF information in the DATA LIST when YES-Go to step 4.
each switch is operating.
• TRUNK LID/TAILGATE SWITCH NO-Go to step 8.
• SECURITY HOOD SWITCH 4. Disconnect the tailgate latch switch 2P connector.
• DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK KNOB SWITCH (UNLOCK)
5. Check the ON/OFF information of the TRUNK LID/TAIL
• FRONT PASSENGER'S DOOR LOCK KNOB SWITCH
(UNLOCK)
• LEFT REAR DOOR LOCK KNOB SWITCH (UNLOCK) Is the data list value indicated OFF?
• RIGHT REAR DOOR LOCK KNOB SWITCH (UNLOCK)
YES-Faulty tailgate latch switch, replace the tailgate
• DRIVER'S DOOR SWITCH
latch (see page 20-161 ) . ■
• FRONT PASSENGER'S DOOR SWITCH
• LEFT REAR DOOR SWITCH NO-Go to step 6.
• RIGHT REAR DOOR SWITCH 6. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector C
• DRIVER'S DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH (LOCK) (49P).
• DRIVER'S DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH (UNLOCK)
Is each switch's information OK? box connector C (49P) terminal No. 22 and body
YES-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.B ground.
NO-Troubleshoot the indicated circuit. ■

• Tailgate latch switch circuit troubleshooting (see page UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR C (49P)
22-138).
• Security hood switch circuit troubleshooting (see
page 22-140).
• Driver's door lock knob switch circuit troubleshooting
(see page 22-141).
fr
1
|Z 4 [/|Z 6 | l/ix iz a i —7
• Passenger's door lock knob switch circuit [37j38l39|4O|41pi] |43p|45l46|47p|lX
troubleshooting (see page 22-143).
• Left rear door lock knob switch circuit troubleshooting T/G SW (ORN)
(see page 22-145).
• Right rear door lock knob switch circuit
• Driver's door switch circuit troubleshooting (see page
22-149).
• Passenger's door switch circuit troubleshooting (see
page 22-150). YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.H
• Left rear door switch circuit troubleshooting (see page
22-152). NO-Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/relay
box.H
• Right rear door switch circuit troubleshooting (see
page 22-153). • USA models (see page 22-65)
• Driver's door key cylinder switch circuit • Canada models (see page 22-66)
8. Disconnect the tailgate latch switch 2P connector.
9. Connect tailgate latch switch 2P connector terminal 12. Connect under-dash fuse/relay box connector C (49P)
No. 1 and body ground with a jumper wire. terminal No. 22 and body ground with a jumper wire.
TAILGATE LATCH SW I TCH 2P CONNECTOR

UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR C (49P)
1
T/G SW (ORN)
JUMPER WIRE
T/G SW (ORN)
JUMPER WIRE
10. Check the ON/OFF information of the TRUNK LID/TAIL
GATE SWITCH in the DATA LIST. Wire side of female terminals
Is the data list value indicated ON? 13. Check the ON/OFF information of the TRUNK LID/TAIL
YES-Go to step 11.
Is the data list value indicated ON?
NO-Go to step 12.
YES-Repair an open or high resistance in the wire.H
11. Check for continuity between tailgate latch switch 2P
connector terminal No. 2 and body ground. NO-Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/relay
b o x .l
TAILGATE LATCH SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR • USA models (see page 22-65)
j€ Z k
GND (BLK)
YES-Faulty tailgate latch switch; replace the tailgate
latch (see page 20-161).H
NO-Repair an open or high resistance in the wire or
poor ground (G602).B
(cont'd)
Security hood switch circuit troubleshooting 9. Connect security hood switch 2P connector terminal
No. 2 and body ground with a jumper wire.
1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
2. With the hood closed, select SECURITY with the HDS, SECURITY HOOD SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR
and enter the DATA LIST.
3. Check the ON/OFF information of the SECURITY
HOOD SWITCH in the DATA LIST.
m
HOOD SW (PUR)
YES-Go to step 4.
JUMPER WIRE
NO-Go to step 8.
Wire side offemale terminal s
4. Disconnect the security hood switch 2P connector.
5. Check the ON/OFF information of the SECURITY 10. Check the ON/OFF information of the SECURITY
HOOD SWITCH in the DATA LIST. HOOD SWITCH in the DATA LIST.
Is the data list value indicated OFF? Is the data list value indicated ON?
YES-Faulty security hood switch; replace the hood YES-Go to step 11.
latch (see page 20-155).■
NO-Go to step 12.
NO-Go to step 6.
11. Check for continuity between security hood switch 2P
6. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector A connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
(36P).
7. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay SECURITY HOOD SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR
box connector A (36P) terminal No. 29 and body
ground.
nr—in
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR A (36P)

<5I>
GND (BLK)
(M)
YES-Faulty security hood switch; replace the hood
latch (see page 20-155).H
Wire side offemale terminal s poor ground (G401).B
YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.H
NO-Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/relay
box.B
8. Disconnect the security hood switch 2P connector.
12. Connect under-dash fuse/relay box connector A (36P) Driver's door lock knob switch circuit
terminal No. 29 and body ground with a jumper wire.
troubleshooting
2. With the driver's door lock knob switch in LOCK
position, select SECURITY with the HDS, and enter the
DATA LIST.
2 IZfrlTE fiF I n- 3. Check the ON/OFF information of the DRIVER'S DOOR
/
23 |24|2W l» i' ' V t/ i^ i
5|26L/|28]29| [3o[^32L/|a»[35| LOCK KNOB SWITCH (UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST.
/
HOOD SW (PUR)
YES-Go to step 4.
JUMPER WI RE
NO-Go to step 8.
Wire side offemale terminals 4. Disconnect the driver's door lock actuator/knob
switch 10P connector.
13. Check the ON/OFF information of the SECURITY
HOOD SWITCH in the DATA LIST.
LOCK KNOB SWITCH (UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST.
Is the data list value indicated OFF?
YES-Repair an open or high resistance in the w ir e .l
YES-Faulty driver's door lock knob switch; replace the
NO-Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/relay driver's door latch (see page 20-11 ) . ■
box.H
NO-Go to step 6.
• Canada models (see page 22-66) 6. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector
E (12P).
Is the data list value indicated OFF?
YES-Repair a short to ground in the w ir e .l
b o x .l
8. Disconnect the driver's door lock actuator/knob
(cont'd)
9. Connect driver's door lock actuator/knob switch 10P 12. Connect under-dash fuse/relay box connector E (12P)
connector terminal No. 7 and body ground with a terminal No. 2 and body ground with a jumper wire.
jumper wire.

DRIVER S DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR/KNOB
UNLOCK (BRN)
_ n ra—
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 / 8 9/ / /
5 6 7 8 9/ JUMPER W I RE
UNLOCK (BRN)
JUMPER WIRE

10. Check the ON/OFF information of the DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK KNOB SWITCH (UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST.
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Go to step 12. box.H
11. Check for continuity between driver's door lock
actuator/knob switch 10P connector terminal No. 5 • Canada models (see page 22-66)
and body ground.

YES-Faulty driver's door lock knob switch; replace the
driver's door latch (see page 20-11 ) . ■
Passenger's door lock knob switch circuit 7. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay
troubleshooting box connector M (34P) terminal No. 24 and body
ground.
2. With the passenger's door lock knob switch in LOCK UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR M (34P)
DATA LIST.
3. Check the ON/OFF information of the FRONT
PASSENGER'S DOOR LOCK KNOB SW (UNLOCK) in 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8/ 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
the DATA LIST. 18 / 20 21 / 23 24 33 34
UNLOCK (PUR)
U
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Go to step 8.
4. Disconnect the passenger's door lock actuator/knob
5. Check the ON/OFF information of the FRONT Is there continuity?
PASSENGER'S DOOR LOCK KNOB SW (UNLOCK) in YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.B
the DATA LIST.
Is the data list value indicated OFF? box.B
YES-Faulty passenger's door lock knob switch; • USA models (see page 22-65)
replace the front passenger's door latch (see page • Canada models (see page 22-66)
20-11).B
8. Disconnect the passenger's door lock actuator/knob
NO-Go to step 6. switch 10P connector.
6. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector

M (34P).
(cont'd)
9. Connect passenger's door lock actuator/knob switch 12. Connect under-dash fuse/relay box connector M (34P)
10P connector terminal No. 8 and body ground with a terminal No. 24 and body ground with a jumper wire.
jumper wire.
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR M (34P)
PASSENGER S DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR/KNOB
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 / 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 / 20 21 / 23 24 / / / / / / / / 33 34
UNLOCK (PUR)
8
UNLOCK (PUR)
JUMPER WIRE
JUMPER WIRE

10. Check the ON/OFF information of the FRONT PASSENGER'S DOOR LOCK KNOB SW (UNLOCK) in
PASSENGER'S DOOR LOCK KNOB SW (UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST.
the DATA LIST.
YES-Go to step 11.
11. Check for continuity between passenger's door lock
and body ground.
PASSENGER'S DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR/KNOB

YES-Faulty passenger's door lock knob switch;
replace the front passenger's door latch (see page
20-11).H
Left rear door lock knob switch circuit 7. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay
troubleshooting box connector C (49P) terminal No. 45 and body
ground.
2. With the left rear door lock knob switch in LOCK
position, select SECURITY with the HDS, and enter the UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR C (49P)
DATA LIST.
3. Check the ON/OFF information of the DRIVER'S REAR
DOOR LOCK KNOB SWITCH (UNLOCK) in the DATA
LIST. > # l/l . eV N , I/1 /N
l^ll l^l [ae) |3j3 8 |3 9 |4 0 |4 ip j| |c ^ 4 5 l4 6 [4 7 |4 8
UNLOCK (WHT)
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Go to step 8.
4. Disconnect the left rear door lock actuator/knob
switch 10P connector. Wire side of female terminals
5. Check the ON/OFF information of the DRIVER'S REAR Is there continuity?

DOOR LOCK KNOB SWITCH (UNLOCK) in the DATA YES- Repair a short to ground in the wire.B
LIST.
Is the data list value indicated OFF? box.B
YES-Faulty left rear door lock knob switch; replace • USA models (see page 22-65)
the left rear door latch (see page 2 0-23 ).■ • Canada models (see page 22-66)
NO-Go to step 6. 8. Disconnect the left rear door lock actuator/knob

C (49P).
9. Connect left rear door lock actuator/knob switch 10P 12. Connect under-dash fuse/relay box connector C (49P)
jumper wire.

LEFT REAR DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR/KNOB
10 ZEZ0 ZI P lm J M ft
? J211220 ~ m /m XA?m —7
CM
||3 i]3 2 |3 3 |/|3 5 |3 6 | [aj 38 [39140[ 41~pt2] [43^ 1 4 5 146|47|4a|

cn
/ / / /
UNLOCK (WHT) UNLOCK (WHT)
^JUMPER WIRE JUMPER WIRE

Wire side offemale terminal s
Wire side of femal e terminals

10. Check the ON/OFF information of the DRIVER'S REAR DOOR LOCK KNOB SWITCH (UNLOCK) in the DATA
DOOR LOCK KNOB SWITCH (UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST.
LIST.
Is data list value indicated ON?
YES-Go to step 11.
11. Check for continuity between left rear door lock • USA models (see page 22-65)
and body ground.
LEFT REAR DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR/KNOB

YES-Faulty left rear door lock knob switch; replace
the left rear door latch (see page 2 0 -2 3 ).■
Right rear door lock knob switch circuit 7. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay
troubleshooting box connector C (49P) terminal No. 46 and body
ground.
2. With the right rear door lock knob switch in LOCK
DATA LIST.
3. Check the ON/OFF information of the PASSENGER'S
REAR DOOR LOCK KNOB SWITCH (UNLOCK) in the
DATA LIST. J 21I22 l / T _ |2 4 |y |2 6 | |A / |29| — 7|
X I|3l[32l33|7|35|36| [3t[38|39|40[4j|42] |4^45|4^47|48|IX
UNLOCK (GRN)
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Go to step 8.
4. Disconnect the right rear door lock actuator/knob
Wire side of fema l e terminals
5. Check the ON/OFF information of the PASSENGER'S Is there continuity?
REAR DOOR LOCK KNOB SWITCH (UNLOCK) in the YES-Repair a short to ground in the w ir e .l
DATA LIST.
Is the data list value indicated OFF? b o x .l
YES-Faulty right rear door lock knob switch; replace • USA models (see page 22-65)
the right rear door latch (see page 20-23).B • Canada models (see page 22-66)
NO-Go to step 6. 8. Disconnect the right rear door lock actuator/knob

C (49P).
(cont'd)
9. Connect right rear door lock actuator/knob switch 10P 12. Connect under-dash fuse/relay box connector C (49P)
jumper wire.

RIGHT REAR DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR/KNOB
R f w [ 7 F l HPV0 W I ft
|2i|22|7l m / m [ \A /m
|^ 3 2 |3 3 (x |3 5 p i[ [37)38 |39l40|4i~[42| [43[ /l4 5 |4 6|47|4^
UNLOCK (GRN)
JjU M P E R WIRE

10. Check the ON/OFF information of the PASSENGER'S REAR DOOR LOCK KNOB SWITCH (UNLOCK) in the
REAR DOOR LOCK KNOB SWITCH (UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST.
DATA LIST.
YES-Go to step 11.
11. Check for continuity between right rear door lock • USA models (see page 22-65)
and body ground.
RIGHT REAR DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR/KNOB

3 | 4
/ / / 8 /1 0
[GND (BLK)
(H)
YES-Faulty right rear door lock knob switch; replace
the right rear door latch (see page 2 0-23).■
Driver's door switch circuit troubleshooting 8. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay
box connector C (49P) terminal No. 33 and body
1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ground.
2. With the driver's door closed, select SECURITY with
the HDS, and enter the DATA LIST. UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR C (49P)
SWITCH in the DATA LIST.
ITfrwPR 0zizizffln ft
YES-Go to step 4. _1211220 ~ l24|7l26|
\A/\7^\ ~y\
l I
[3lj32|33L/|35|36| [37|38>39l40|4ip2| |43]/l45|46|47|48|/
NO-Go to step 9.
DOOR SW (DR) (BLU)
4. Remove the driver's door switch.
5. Disconnect the driver's door switch 1P connector.
6. Check for continuity between driver's door switch 1P Wire side of femal e terminals
connector and switch ground.
DRIVER S DOOR SWITCH
YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.B
box.B
9. Remove the driver's door switch.
10. Disconnect the driver's door switch 1P connector.
11. Check for continuity between the driver's door switch
1P connector and switch ground.
DRIVER S DOOR SWITCH

Is there no continuity when the switch is pushed and is
there continuity when the switch is released?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Faulty driver's door switch; replace the driver's
door switch.■
7. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector C
(49P).

YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Faulty driver's door switch; replace the driver's
door switch.®
(cont'd)
12. Connect under-dash fuse/relay box connector C (49P) Passenger's door switch circuit
troubleshooting
2. With the passenger's door closed, select SECURITY
with the HDS, and enter the DATA LIST.
PASSENGER'S DOOR SWITCH in the DATA LIST.
10ZH Z02
7 I21I22L / ] |2 4 |/|2 6 | 7 |y l/ | 2 9 | —7
[3 l)3 2 |3 3 |7 |3 5 p | |^ l 3 9 j M | 4 i j 4 ^ I Is the data list value indicated ON?
YES-Go to step 4.
DOOR SW (DR) (BLU)
NO-Go to step 9.
JUMPER WIRE
4. Remove the passenger's door switch.
Wire side offemale terminals 5. Disconnect the passenger's door switch 1P connector.
13. Check the ON/OFF information of the DRIVER'S DOOR 6. Check for continuity between passenger's door
SWITCH in the DATA LIST. switch IP connector and switch ground.
PASSENGER S DOOR SWITCH
box.H

YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Faulty passenger's door switch; replace the
passenger's door switch.!
(49P).
8. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay 12. Connect under-dash fuse/relay box connector C (49P)
box connector C (49P) terminal No. 32 and body terminal No. 32 and body ground with a jumper wire.
ground.

!7frwl
7N M y f ft
,1717171 ft \il\22\A l24|7|26| W|29| 7
|3l]32|33L /|35|36| [37[38|39|40|4 1[42) [43[ / |45l46|47|46|lX
mA |24|7|26| lAAm
‘ laslsel [37J38139140[41)42] [43[ / l4 5 | 4 6 |4 7 p j] i/ I
DOOR SW (AS) (LT GRN)

DOOR SW (AS) (LT GRN)
JUMPER WIRE

Is there continuity? PASSENGER'S DOOR SWITCH in the DATA LIST.
YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.B Is the data list value indicated ON?
NO-Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/relay YES-Repair an open or high resistance in the wire.B
box.B
• USA models (see page 22-65) box.B
9. Remove the passenger's door switch. • Canada models (see page 22-155)
10. Disconnect the passenger's door switch 1P connector.
11. Check for continuity between passenger's door
switch 1P connector and switch ground.
PASSENGER'S DOOR SWITCH

YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Faulty passenger's door switch; replace the
passenger's door switch.■
(cont'd)
Left rear door switch circuit troubleshooting 8. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay
box connector C (49P) terminal No. 26 and body
1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ground.
2. With the left rear door closed, select SECURITY with
the HDS, and enter the DATA LIST. UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR C (49P)
DOOR SWITCH in the DATA LIST.
r^ rrp w i v m z m B zzzm * ft
YES-Go to step 4. |2 ll2 2 0 “ |24l7l26l
6[ ' " 1| / /VIX I2
M9 I -p .
|3 i ] 32|33|7|35|36| |jffi» |3 9 |4 6 4 l|4 2 | [43|^ 1 4514614T p s ] I X
NO-Go to step 9.
DOOR SW (LR) (PNK)
4. Remove the left rear door switch.
5. Disconnect the left rear door switch 1P connector.
6. Check for continuity between left rear door switch 1P Wire side of female terminal s
connector and switch ground.
LEFT REAR DOOR SWITCH
YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.H
box.H
9. Remove the left rear door switch.
10. Disconnect the left rear door switch 1P connector.
11. Check for continuity between the left rear door switch
1P connector and switch ground.
LEFT REAR DOOR SWITCH

YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Faulty left rear door switch; replace the left rear
door switch.■
(49 P).

YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Faulty left rear door switch; replace the left rear
door switch.■
12. Connect under-dash fuse/relay box connector C (49P) Right rear door switch circuit troubleshooting
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR C (49P) 2. With the right rear door closed, select SECURITY with
the HDS, and enter the DATA LIST.
REAR DOOR SWITCH in the DATA LIST.
YES-Go to step 4.
DOOR SW (LR) (PNK) NO-Go to step 9.
JUMPER WIRE 4. Remove the right rear door switch.

5. Disconnect the right rear door switch 1P connector.
6. Check for continuity between right rear door switch
13. Check the ON/OFF information of the DRIVER'S REAR 1P connector and switch ground.
DOOR SWITCH in the DATA LIST.
RIGHT REAR DOOR SWITCH
YES-Repair an open or high resistance in the wire.B
b o x .l
Is there no continuity when the switch is pushed and is ,

YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Faulty right rear door switch; replace the right
rear door switch.■
(49P).
(cont'd)
8. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay 12. Connect under-dash fuse/relay box connector C (49P)
box connector C (49P) terminal No. 40 and body terminal No. 40 and body ground with a jumper wire.
ground.

V tm A 7 R W \7 u W \ ft
|2*1|22|/]
|21 |22 [ / | . 1241X1261
M/I?l V l/N — 7
[3lj3 2 |3 3 |/|3 5 | 36] [37j3e(39|40|41 [42 I [43p j4 S |4 6 [47
DOOR SW (RR) (GRN)

J DOOR SW (RR) (GRN)
^ JUMPER WIRE
(Q )

Is there continuity? REAR DOOR SWITCH in the DATA LIST.
YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.B Is the data list value indicated ON?
NO-Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/relay YES-Repair an open or high resistance in the wire.H
box.H
• USA models (see page 22-65) box.H
• Canada models (see page 22-66) • USA models (see page 22-65)
9. Remove the right rear door switch. • Canada models (see page 22-66)
10. Disconnect the right rear door switch 1P connector.
11. Check for continuity between the right rear door
switch 1P connector and switch ground.
RIGHT REAR DOOR SWITCH

YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Faulty right rear door switch; replace the right
rear door switch.■
Driver's door key cylinder switch circuit 7. Check for continuity between driver's door lock
troubleshooting actuator/knob switch 10P connector terminal No. 5
and body ground.
NOTE: Before troubleshooting, check the B-CAN DTCs. If
any DTC is indicated, refer to the B-CAN System
Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-107), and SWITCH 10P CONNECTOR
troubleshoot the indicated DTCs first.
2. Disconnect the 10P connector from the driver's door
lock actuator/knob switch.
3. Connect driver's door lock actuator/knob switch 10P
connector terminal No. 9 and body ground with a
jumper wire.

__ n p YES-Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/relay
1 2 b o x .l
CJI
00
6 7 9 • USA models (see page 22-65)

/
LOCK (PUR) • Canada models (see page 22-66)
JUMPER WIRE NO-Repair an open or high resistance in the wire or
poor ground (G 50 1).l
Wire side of female terminals 8. Connect under-dash fuse/relay box connector E (12P)
4. Select SECURITY with the HDS, and enter the DATA

LIST. UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR E (12P)

KEY CYLINDER SWITCH (LOCK) in the DATA LIST.
LOCK (PUR)
-J L - -J T —
Is data list value indicated ON? 1 2 3 4 5 6
YES-Go to step 6. / 8 9 / / /
NO-Go to step 8. JUMPER WIRE

6. Test the door key cylinder switch (see page 22-166).
Is the switch OK? Wire side of female terminals
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Faulty driver's door key cylinder switch; replace 9. Check the ON/OFF information of the DRIVER'S DOOR
the driver's door latch (see page 20-11 ) . ■ KEY CYLINDER SWITCH (LOCK) in the DATA LIST.
Is data list value indicated ON?
YES-Repair an open or high resistance in the w ire.B
b o x .l
MICU Input Test
NOTE:
• Before testing, check the No. 1 (10 A), No. 20 (15 A), No. 22 (7.5 A), No. 27 (30 A), No. 35 (10 A), No. 36 (15 A), No. 38
(15A), No. 49 (15 A), No. 50 (15 A), and No. 60 (50 A) fuses in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
• There are two pairs of fuses in the same circuit (No. 35 and No. 49 fuses, No. 36 and No. 50 fuses). If one of the fuses is
blown, check the another fuse in the same circuit If necessary, replace the damaged fuse(s).
3. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connectors A, B, C, E, F, K, M, N, Q, and W.
NOTE: All connector views are shown from wire side of female terminals.
CONNECTOR A (36P) CONNECTOR B (36P)
1 h 7 |l8 l/l 1201211Z21 ' -71

-----[g [2 4 |2 S l i l 7 |a p ] |3oj 31132133|3413s|\s
PUR WHT
CONNECTOR C (49P)
ORN PNK
LT GRN BLU PNK YEL GRN WHT GRN LT BLU YEL
CONNECTOR E (12P) CONNECTOR F (6P) CONNECTOR K(10P)

GRY BRN PUR GRN LT GRN PNK BLK
1 2 3 4 5 6 2 1 2 r —i. 3 /
P37!.4r—|-t5
/ 8 9 / / / j—
6
--- L
5 6 7 J8 / 10
TnJ
LT BLU RED LT BLU YEL RED BLK

CONNECTOR IVI (34P) CONNECTOR N (8P) CONNECTOR Q (16P) CONNECTOR W (IP)
BLK PNK BLK LT GRN
n _ _i 3___
7 —Ll 3___ P--- r n-i
1 2 3 4 5 6 81/ 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1 r —% 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
18 / 20 21 / 23 24 / / / / / / / / 33 34 4 5 |6 7 8
--- L
9 10 11 / 13 14 / 16
P
YEL
GRN PUR GRY BLK
• If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary and recheck the system.
Cavity Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if desired
result is not obtained
E6 LT GRN Connect the battery Check actuator operation: • Faulty driver's door lock
F2 PNK positive terminal to The driver's door lock actuator actuator
terminal E6 (F2), and should unlock (or lock). • An open or high resistance
terminal F2 (E6) to in the wire
body ground
K5 LT BLU Connect the battery Check actuator operation: • Faulty front passenger's
K6 YEL positive terminal to The front passenger's door lock door lock actuator
terminal K5 (K6), and actuator should lock (or unlock). • An open or high resistance
terminal K6 (K5) to in the wire
body ground
C35 PNK Connect the battery Check actuator operation: • Faulty left rear door lock
C36 YEL positive terminal to The left rear door lock actuator actuator
terminal C35 (C36), should lock (or unlock). • An open or high resistance
and terminal C36 in the wire
(C35) to body ground
C47 LT BLU Connect the battery Check actuator operation: • Faulty right rear door lock
C48 YEL positive terminal to The right rear door lock actuator actuator
terminal C47 (C48), and the tailgate lock actuator • Faulty tailgate lock actuator
and terminal C48 should lock (or unlock). • An open or high resistance
(C47) to body ground in the wire
A13* GRN Under all conditions Connect terminal A13 and • Faulty security horn
terminal B23 with a jumper wire: • An open or high resistance
The horn should sound. in the wire
• Poor ground
*: With security
(cont'd)
MICU Input Test (cont'd)
6. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box, and do these input tests at the following connectors.
• If all the input tests prove OK, the MICU must be faulty; replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. (see page 22-65)
K10 BLK In all iginition switch Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G502) or an
positions There should be less than 0.2 V. open in the ground wire
• An open or high resistance
in the wire
Q9 BLK In all iginition switch Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G502) or an
in the wire
M16 BLK In all iginition switch Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G501) or an
in the wire
N2 BLK In all iginition switch Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G501) or an
in the wire
M23* GRN Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G503) or an
There should be less than 0.2 V. open in the ground wire
• Faulty audio unit
in the wire
B23 WHT Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 3 (20 A) fuse in
There should be battery voltage. the battery terminal fuse
box
in the wire
W1 YEL Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 1 (100 A) fuse in
There should be battery voltage. the battery terminal fuse
box
• Blown No. 60 (IGN) (50 A)
fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box
• Faulty ignition switch
in the wire
*: With security
C33 BLU Driver's door open Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty driver's door switch
There should be less than 0.2 V. • An open or high resistance
in the wire
Driver's door closed Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty driver's door switch
There should be about 5 V o r • A short to ground in the
more. wire
C32 LT GRN Front passenger's Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty front passenger's
door open There should be less than 0.2 V. door switch
in the wire
Front passenger’s Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty front passenger's
door closed There should be about 5 V or door switch
more. • A short to ground in the
wire
C26 PNK Left rear door open Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty left rear door switch
in the wire
Left rear door closed Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty left rear door switch
There should be about 5 V or • A short to ground in the
more. wire
C40 GRN Right rear door open Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty right rear door switch
in the wire
Right rear door Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty right rear door switch
closed There should be about 5 V or • A short to ground in the
more. wire
C22 ORN Tailgate open Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty tailgate latch switch
There should be less than 0.2 V. • Poor ground (G602) or an
open in the ground wire
in the wire
Tailgate closed Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty tailgate latch switch
more. wire
A29* PUR Hood open Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty hood switch
There should be less than 0.2 V. • Poor ground (G401) or an
in the wire
Hood closed Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty hood switch
more. wire
*: With security
(cont'd)
E9 RED Driver's door lock Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G501) or an
knob switch in LOCK There should be less than 0.2 V. open in the ground wire
• Faulty driver's door lock
knob switch
® An open or high resistance
in the wire
Driver's door lock Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty driver's door switch
knob switch in There should be about 5 V or lock knob switch
UNLOCK more. • A short to ground in the
wire
E2 BRN Driver's door lock Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G501) or an
knob switch in There should be less than 0.2 V. open in the ground wire
UNLOCK • Faulty driver's door lock
knob switch
in the wire
Driver's door lock Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty driver's door lock
knob switch in LOCK There should be about 5 V or knob switch
wire
M24 PUR Front passenger's Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G502) or an
door lock knob There should be less than 0.2 V. open in the ground wire
switch in UNLOCK • Faulty front passenger's
door lock knob switch
in the wire
Front passenger's Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty front passenger's
door lock knob There should be about 5 V or door lock knob switch
switch in LOCK more. • A short to ground in the
wire
€45 WHT Left rear door lock Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G601) or an
UNLOCK • Faulty left rear door lock
knob switch
in the wire
Left rear door lock Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty left rear door lock
wire
C46 GRN Right rear door lock Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G603) or an
UNLOCK • Faulty right rear door lock
knob switch
in the wire
Right rear door lock Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty right rear door lock
wire
M34 GRY Ignition key inserted Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G501) or an
into the ignition There should be less than 0.2 V. open in the ground wire
switch • Faulty ignition key switch
in the wire
Ignition switch LOCK Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty ignition key switch
(0), and the ignition There should be about 5 V or • A short to ground in the
key removed from more. wire
the ignition switch
E3 PUR Driver's door key Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G501) or an
cylinder switch in There should be less than 0.2 V. open in the ground wire
LOCK • Faulty driver's door key
cylinder switch
in the wire
Driver's door key Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty driver's door key
cylinder switch in There should be about 5 V or cylinder switch
neutral or UNLOCK more. • A short to ground in the
wire
E4 GRN Driver's door key Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G501) or an
cylinder switch in There should be less than 0.2 V. open in the ground wire
UNLOCK • Faulty driver's door key
cylinder switch
in the wire
Driver's door key Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty driver's door key
cylinder switch in There should be about 5 V or cylinder switch
neutral or LOCK more. • A short to ground in the
wire
E8* LT BLU Driver's door lock Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G501) or an
switch in LOCK There should be less than 0.2 V. open in the ground wire
• Faulty door lock switch
in the wire
Driver's door lock Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty door lock switch
switch in neutral or There should be about 5 V or • A short to ground in the
UNLOCK more. wire
Er GRY Driver's door lock Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G501) or an
switch in UNLOCK There should be less than 0.2 V. open in the ground wire
• Faulty door lock switch
in the wire
Driver's door lock Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty door lock switch
switch in neutral or There should be about 5 V or • A short to ground in the
LOCK more. wire
*: With driver's door lock switch
Door Lock Actuator Test
D river's D o o r Front P a s s e n g e r 's D o o r
1. Remove the driver's door panel (see page 20-6). 1. Remove the front passenger's door panel (see page
20 - 6 ).
2. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) from the door latch
(B). 2. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) from the door latch
(B).
1 | 2
^ v :
5 |6 |7 8I9 1 / 3 | 4
/ V
8 | / | 10
/ l / l /
3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and

ground according to the table. To prevent damage to 3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and
the actuator, apply battery voltage only momentarily. ground according to the table. To prevent damage to
the actuator, apply battery voltage only momentarily.
Terminal
1 2 Terminal
Position 3 4
Position \
LOCK © ©
LOCK © ©
UNLOCK © ©
UNLOCK © ©
4. If the actuator does not operate as specified, the
actuator is faulty; replace the front door latch (see 4. If the actuator does not operate as specified, the
page 20-11). actuator is faulty; replace the front door latch (see
page 20-11).
Left Rear Door Right Rear Door
1. Remove the left rear door panel (see page 20-18). 1. Remove the right rear door panel (see page 20-18).
2. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) from the door latch 2. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) from the door latch
(B). (B).
----------- F = r---------—
1 2
5 / / / /
3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and 3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and
ground according to the table. To prevent damage to ground according to the table. To prevent damage to
the actuator, apply battery voltage only momentarily. the actuator, apply battery voltage only momentarily.
Terminal Terminal
1 2 3 4
Position \ Position
LOCK © LOCK © ©
UNLOCK © © UNLOCK © ©
4. If the actuator does not operate as specified, the 4. If the actuator does not operate as specified, the
actuator is faulty; replace the rear door latch (see page actuator is faulty; replace the rear door latch (see page
20-23). 20-23).
Tailgate Lock Actuator Test Door Lock Knob Switch Test
1. Open the tailgate. Driver's Door

2. Remove the tailgate lower trim panel (see page 1. Remove the driver's door panel (see page 20-6).
20-78).
3. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the tailgate lock (B).
latch (B).
1 | 2
/V ,
5 | 6 | 7 8 |g |7

ground according to the table. To prevent damage to
the actuator, apply battery voltage only momentarily.
3. Check for continuity between the terminals.
Terminal • There should be continuity between terminals No. 6
1 2 and No. 5 when the door lock knob switch is in the
Position LOCK position and no continuity when the switch is
LOCK © © in the UNLOCK position.
UNLOCK • There should be continuity between terminals No. 7
© ©
and No. 5 when the door lock knob switch is in the
5. If the actuator does not work, the tailgate lock actuator UNLOCK position and no continuity when the
is faulty; replace the tailgate latch (see page 20-161). switch is in the LOCK position.
4. If the continuity is not as specified, the switch is faulty;
replace the front door latch (see page 20-11).
Front Passenger's Door Rear Door
1. Remove the passenger's door panel (see page 20-6). 1. Remove the left or right rear door panel (see page
20-18).
(B). 2. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) from the door latch
(B).
NOTE; The illustration shows the left rear door.
3 | 4
LEFT REAR DOOR RIGHT REAR DOOR
A V 8 | / 1 10
1| 2 ^ 1 ^ 3 | 4
5M 7 / V I / / W 8 l / l 10

There should be continuity between terminals No. 8
and No. 10 when the door lock knob switch in the 3. Check for continuity between the terminals.
UNLOCK position and no continuity when the switch
is in the LOCK position. There should be continuity between terminals No. 7
[No. 8] and No. 5 [No. 10] when the door lock knob
4. If the continuity is not as specified, the switch is faulty; switch is UNLOCK position and no continuity when
replace the front door latch (see page 20-11). the switch is in the LOCK position.
[ ]: Right rear door
replace the rear door latch (see page 20-23).
Door Key Cylinder Switch Test Security Horn Test/Replacement
1. Remove the driver's door panel (see page 20-6). With security
2. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) from the door latch 1. Remove the front bumper (see page 20-144).
(B).
2. Disconnect the 1P connector (A) from horn (B).
3. Test the horn by connecting battery power to the

terminal (A) and grounding the bracket (B). The horn
should sound.
and No. 5 when the door key cylinder switch is in
UNLOCK position.
• There should be no continuity between terminals
No. 7 and No. 5 when the door key cylinder switch is
in the neutral or LOCK position.
and No. 5 when the door key cylinder switch is in
LOCK position.
No. 6 and No. 5 when the door key cylinder switch is
in the neutral or UNLOCK position.
replace the front door latch (see page 20-11).
4. If it fails to sound, replace it.

Security Hood Switch Test Transmitter Test
With security NOTE:

• If the doors unlock or lock with the transmitter, but the
1. Open the hood. LED on the transmitter does not come on, the LED is
2. Remove the front grille cover (see page 20-166). faulty; replace the transmitter.
• If any door or the tailgate is open, you cannot lock the
3. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the hood switch doors with the transmitter.
(B).
• If you unlocked the doors or the tailgate with the
transmitter, but do not open any of the doors within
30 seconds, the doors relock automatically.
• The doors do not lock or unlock with the transmitter if
the ignition key is inserted in the ignition switch.
With HDS
1. Press the transmitter lock or unlock button at least 10
times to reset the transmitter.
• If the locks work, the transmitter is OK.
• If any of the transmitter buttons do not work,
replace the transmitter, then do the transmitter
programming (see page 22-335).
• If the locks don't work, go to step 2.
2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector(DLC).
3. Select KEYLESS TRANSMITTER from the BODY
ELECTRICAL, next select INSPECTION then enter the
KEYLESS CHECK.
• There should be continuity between terminals No. 1 4. Follow the screen prompts to check each button
and No. 2 when the hood is opened (lever released). operation.
• There should be no continuity between terminals NOTE: The door lock actuators may or may not cycle
No. 1 and No. 2 when the hood is closed (lever when receiving input from the transmitter.
pushed down). • If KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER CODE WAS
5. If the continuity is not as specified, the switch is faulty; RECEIVED is indicated, the transmitter is OK.
replace the hood latch (see page 20-155). • If DIFFERENT KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER
CODE WAS RECEIVED is indicated, the transmitter
is working but not registered to the vehicle. If
necessary, reprogram and register the transmitter
(see page 22-335).
• If KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER CODE WAS
NOT RECEIVED is indicated, go to step 5.
(cont'd)
Transmitter Test (cont'd)
5. Open the transmitter and check for water damage. 7. Use a known-good keyless transmitter assembly and
® If you find any water damage, replace the repeat steps 3 and 4.
transmitter, then register the new transmitter (see NOTE: The keyless transmitter does not need to be
page 22-335). programmed to the vehicle for this test.
• If there is no water damage, go to step 6. • If (DIFFERENT) KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER
CODE IS RECEIVED is indicated, replace the keyless
transmitter and do the immobilizer system
registration (see page 22-335).
• If KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER CODE IS NOT
RECEIVED is indicated, the immobilizer-keyless
control unitis faulty, replace it and do the
immobilizer system registration (see page 22-335).
NOTE: The keyless transmitter is combined with the
immobilizer transponder, so when the transponder is
registered by the HDS, the keyless transmitter
programming is completed automatically.
6. Replace the transmitter battery (A) with a new one,

and press the lock or unlock button and check the
response on the screen of the HDS.
RECEIVED is indicated, the transmitter is OK.
NOT RECEIVED is indicated, go to step 7.
Without HDS 4. Replace the transmitter battery (A) with a new one,
and try to lock and unlock the doors with the
1. Start the engine. transmitter by pressing the lock or unlock button at
• If the engine does not start, go to the immobilizer least 10 times.
system troubleshooting (see page 22-326). • If the doors lock and unlock, the transmitter is OK.
• If the engine starts, go to step 2. • If the doors don't lock and unlock, go to step 5.
2. Press the transmitter lock or unlock button at least 10
times to reset the transmitter.
• If the locks work, the transmitter is OK.
• If the locks don't work, go to step 3.
3. Open the transmitter and check for water damage.
• If you find any water damage, replace the
transmitter and register the new transmitter.
• If there is no water damage, go to step 4.
5. Reprogram and register the transmitter (see page

22-335), then try to lock and unlock the doors.
• If the doors lock and unlock, the transmitter is OK.
• If the doors do not lock and unlock, substitute a
known-good transmitter register it and recheck (see
page 22-335). If still not operating, replace the
immobilizer-keyless control unit (see page 22-336).
Tripped Sensor History
The security system stores information on the last

tripped sensor if the security system has been actuated.
The information can be retrieved using the HDS.
To retrieve the last tripped sensor data:
1. Select HISTORY DATA from the security system test
mode menu.
2. Scroll through the data list
• Sensors that were actuated will indicate ON.
• Sensors that were not actuated will indicate NONE.
3. Inspect the ON circuit for these problems:
• Misadjusted or damaged switch.
• Loose or corroded connections.
• Intermittent short to ground.
NOTE: If PANIC Frame Reception is indicated ON,
inform the customer that it could have been set by
something pressing the panic button of one of the
registered remotes while in a pocket or purse, under a
stack of papers, etc.
Test/Replacement, page 22-174

Circuit Diagram
With Security System
BATTERY
UNDER-DASH
B23 FUSE/RELAY BOX
1 No. 24
r doA>
MICU
~~ K3
PUR
PUR PUR
Without Security System
*1 : W ith cruise control

*2 : W ithout cruise control
Horn Test/Replacement
'09-11 models *12 model

1. Remove the front grille cover (see page 20-166). 1. Remove the front grille cover (see page 20-166).
2. Disconnect the 1P connector (A) from the horn (B). 2. Disconnect the 1P connector (A) from the horn (B).
3. Connect the terminal (A) to battery power, and the

bracket (B) to body ground.
3. Connect the terminal (A) to battery power, and the

bracket (B) to body ground.
Horn Switch Test
09-11 models 3. Using a jumper wire, connect the dashboard wire

harness 20P connector terminal No. 1 to body ground.
NOTE: SRS components are located in this area. Review The horn should sound.
the SRS component locations (see page 24-13), and • If the horn sounds, go to step 4.
• If the horn does not sound, check these items:
- Battery terminal fuse box No. 3 (20A) fuse.
1. Remove the steering column covers (see page - No. 24 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay
20-105). box.
2. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness 20P - Horn (see page 22-174).
connector (A) from the cable reel (B). - Horn relay (with security) (see page 22-76).
- MICU(without security).
1_ _n_ _TL_ - An open in the wire.
2 3 4 5 / 7 8 9 10 Wire side of
female terminals
/ / 13 14 15 / / / / /
DASHBOARD W I RE HARNESS 20P CONNECTOR
HORN (ORN)
p_ n ri
0
1 2 3 4 / 7 8 9 10
LD
/ / 13 14 / / / / /
JUMPER WIRE
Wire side offem a l e terminals
4. Reconnect the dashboard wire harness 20P connector

(A) to the cable reel (B).
5. Remove the driver’s airbag assembly (see page

24-171), and disconnect the horn switch 1P positive
terminal (C) from the driver's airbag.
(cont’d)
Horn Switch Test (cont'd)
6. Check for continuity between the dashboard wire *12 model

harness 20P connector terminal No. 1 and the
steering wheel switch 20P connector terminal No. 11. NOTE:
• If there is continuity, go to step 7. • SRS components are located in this area. Review the
• If there is no continuity, replace the cable reel (see SRS component locations (see page 24-13), and
page 24-186). precautions and procedures (see page 24-15) before
STEERING WHEEL SWITCH 20P CONNECTOR • Before testing, check the No. 24 (10 A) fuse in the
Wire side of female term i nals under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is blown, repair
1_ JL. pit— ri a short to ground in the No. 24 (10 A) fuse circuit.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1. Remove the steering column covers (see page
11 12 13 14 15 / / / / / 20-105).
HORN (GRN/YEL)*1, (ORN)*2
2. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness 20P
connector (A) from the cable reel (B).
HORN (ORN)
n n -jt- __ri
1 2 3 4 5 / 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 / 7 8 9 10 Wire side of
female terminals
/ / 13 14 15 / / / 13 14 15 / / / / /
/ / / /
DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS 20P CONNECTOR

W i re side offemale terminals
*1: With cruise control

*2: Without cruise control
7. Check for continuity between the steering wheel

switch 20P connector terminal No. 11 and the horn
switch 1P positive terminal.
• If there is continuity, check the installation of the
driver's airbag assembly and the steering wheel.
If OK, replace the driver's airbag assembly. 3. Connect dashboard wire harness 20P connector
terminal No. 1 and No. 2 with a jumper wire. The horn
• If there is no continuity, repair an open in the wire.
should sound.
• If the horn sounds, go to step 7.
STEERING WHEEL SWITCH 20P CONNECTOR
Wire side offemale terminals • If the horn does not sound, go to step 4.
ri - J l— n 4. Remove the jumper wire from the dashboard wire
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
harness 20P connector.
11 12 13 14 15 / / / / /
HORN 5. Check for continuity between dashboard wire harness
(GRN/YEL)*1
(ORN)*2 20P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground. There
© 1HHORN (GRN/YEL)
should be continuity.
0 • If there is continuity, go to step 6.

• If there is no continuity, repair an open or high
resistance in the wire, or poor ground (G501).
HORN SWITCH 1P POSITIVE TERMI NAL
Wire side of femal e terminals
* 1: With cruise control

*2: Without cruise control
6. Measure the voltage between dashboard wire 10. Check for continuity between ground terminal (G551)
harness 20P connector terminal No. 1 and body and cable reel subharness 20P connector terminal
ground. There should be battery voltage. No. 12. There should be continuity.
• If there is battery voltage, check these items: • If there is continuity, go to step 11.
- Faulty horn. • If there is no continuity, check for:
- Faulty horn relay (with security). - An open or high resistance in the wire, replace
- Faulty MICU (without security). the cable reel subharness.
- An open or high resistance in the wire between - Poor ground (G551).
the horn and the under-dash fuse relay box.
• If there is no battery voltage, check for continuity Wire side of female terminals
between the cable reel and the under-dash fuse
relay box. G551 1 2 3 4 5 / 7 8 9 10
7. Reconnect dashboard wire harness 20P connector to / / 13 14 15 / / / / /
the cable reel, then remove the driver's airbag
assembly (see page 24-171).
8. Connect cable reel subharness 20P connector
terminals No. 11 and No. 12 with a jumper wire. The
horn should sound.
• If the horn sounds, go to step 9.
• If the horn does not sound, replace the cable reel
(see page 24-186).
9. Disconnect the cable reel subharness 20P connector
(A).

11. Check for continuity between cable reel subharness
20P connector terminal No. 11 and horn switch
T 2 3 4 5 / 7 8 9 10
13 14 15 /
positive terminal 1P. There should be continuity.
/ / / / / /
• If there is continuity, check or adjust the installation
of the driver's airbag and the horn switch plate or
replace the driver's airbag assembly.
• If there is no continuity, repair an open in the wire,
or replace the cable reel subharness (see page
17-7).
Replacement, page 22-206
Bulb Replacement, page 22-203
REAR TURN SIGNAL LIGHT
Bul b Replacement, page 22-203
BACK-UP LIGHT
Bulb Replacement, page 22-203
(cont'd)
Component Location Index (cont'd)
DRL I NDICATOR LIGHTS-ON INDICATOR

System Description
Headlights System Description

The headlight system is composed of the MICU, the headlight and dimmer/flash-to-pass switches (inside the
combination light switch), the left and right headlights, and the high beam indicator.
The MICU controls the front parking/side marker lights, headlights, taillights and license plate lights.
Low Beams
When you move the headlight switch to the ON position and the dimmer/flash-to-pass switch to the low position, a
ground signal is supplied to terminal No.5 of under-dash fuse/relay box connector M (34P). The MICU then energizes the
low beam control circuit, supplying battery voltage to the low beam of the headlights, turning them on.
NOTE: If there is a B-CAN communication failure, the headlight back-up circuit commands the right low beam to come
on when the ignition is on and the headlight switch is in the headlight position. The right high beam does not come on if
there is a B-CAN system failure.
High Beams
When you turn the headlight switch to the ON position and the dimmer/flash-to-pass switch to the high position, ground
signals are supplied to terminals No. 3 and No. 5 of under-dash fuse/relay box connector M (34P). The MICU then
energizes the high beam headlight control circuits, supplying battery voltage to the high beam headlights, turning them
on.
Flash-to-Pass
When you pull the dimmer/flash-to-pass switch to the passing position, a ground signal is supplied to under-dash fuse/
relay box (MICU) connector M (34P) terminal No. 4. The MICU then energizes the high beam control circuits for as long
as the switch is held, supplying battery voltage to the high beam headlights, turning them on.
Daytime Running Lights System Description
The daytime running lights system includes the MICU, the left and right high beam headlights, the parking brake switch,
and the DRL indicator on the gauge control module. The daytime running lights operate with the ignition switch turned
to ON (II), the headlights off (headlight switch OFF or in the parking position), and the parking brake released.
When the daytime running lights are on, the MICU turns the high beam headlight control circuit on and off (duty cycle),
which provides a reduced voltage (approximately 4—8 volts) to the high beam headlights (via the No. 48 and No. 51
fuses in the under-dash fuse/relay box; the high beam headlights come on with reduced brightness. The MICU also
sends a signal to the gauge control module, and the DRL indication is indicated on the gauge.
NOTE:
• The daytime running lights are disabled when the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0). To keep the daytime running
lights from coming on, apply the parking brake switch while the ignition switch is in LOCK (0) position. When youthen
turn the ignition switch back to ON (II), the daytime running lights will not come on until the parking brake is released.
• The headlights revert to normal operation when you turn them on with the headlight switch.
Circuit Diagram
BATTERY TERMINAL UNDER-DASH
G501 G 502 G501 G502 G501 G301 G201

*1 : HIGH BEAM INDICATOR (LED)
*2 ; LIGHT-ON INDICATOR (LED)
*3 : DRL INDICATOR (LED)
- : B-CAN line
UNDER-D ASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX GAUGE CONTROL MODULE
i I
G301 G201 G 602 G6G4 G 602 G602
Circuit Diagram - Back-up Lights
BATTERY TERMINAL
FUSE BOX IGNITION SWITCH
(Am
Circuit Diagram - Brake Lights
BATTERY TERMINAL
BATTERY
No. 3 (20 A)
—crXjO-
_£L _CL JJ-

G602 6602 G604
Circuit Diagram - Fog Lights
------ : B-CAN line

FUSE BOX FUSE/RELAY BOX
_G_ J l. _Q_ -O- _£L
G501 G502 G501 G 502 G401 G 204

DTC Troubleshooting
DTC B1078: Daytime Running Light for 9. Measure the voltage between body ground and
under-dash fuse/relay box connector M (34P) terminal
Canada Circuit Malfunction
No. 16, and between body ground and under-dash
DTC B1079: Daytime Running Light for USA fuse/relay box connector Q (16P) terminal No. 9.
Circuit Malfunction
Test Mode A (see page 22-107). GND (BLK)
1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 / 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

18 / 20 21 / 23 24 / / / / / / / / 33 34
2. Pull the parking brake lever.
4. Release the parking brake lever.
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to Wire side offemale terminals
ON (II).
Is D T C B 1 0 7 8 o r B 1 0 7 9 in d ic a t e d ?
YES-Go to step 7. r* n n p
1 2 3 4 5 6 / 8
Check for loose or poor connections.® 9 10 11 / 13 14 / 16
GND (BLK)
7. Turn the headlight switch ON (high beam).
D o b o t h h e a d lig h t s ( h ig h b e a m ) c o m e o n ?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 11.
8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Is th e r e le s s th a n 0 .1 V ?
YES-Go to step 10.
poor ground (G501, G502).B
(cont'd)
10. Measure the voltage between body ground and 11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and turn the
under-dash fuse/relay box connector K (10P) terminal headlight switch OFF.
No. 10, and body ground and under-dash fuse/relay
12. Check the No. 28 (20A), No. 48 (10A) and No. 51 (10A)
box connector N (8P) terminal No. 2.
fuses in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR K (10P) A r e a ll fu s e s O K ?

YES-Go to step 13.
1_ NO-Replace the blown fuse and recheck. If the No. 28
1 2i— i 3 / (20 A) fuse is blown again, replace the under-dash
5 6 7 8 / 10 fuse/relay box. If the No. 48 (10 A) or No. 51 (10 A) fuse
U--- 1L
GND (BLK) I is blown again, repair a short in the wire between the
under-dash fuse/relay box and appropriate headlight
(y) (high beam).H
13. Check the headlight bulbs.
Wire side offemale terminals A r e th e h e a d lig h t b u lb s O K ?
YES-Go to step 14.
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR N (8P) NO-Replace the bulb and recheck.H
GND (BLK) 14. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connectors A
_r (36P) and B (36P).
1 i— i 2 3
15. Disconnect both of the headlight 3P connectors.
4 5 6 7 8
j— ---L
16. Check for continuity between the right headlight 3P
connector terminal No. 3 and under-dash fuse/relay
box connector A (36P) terminal No. 30.
±
Wire side of female term i nals
... "~~*
Is th e r e le s s th a n 0 .1 V ? 2
/ Iiel/ l isI \A /\m
YES-Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/relay / 23 s pTOT5|i|
box.H Cj lj l_ e
• USA models (see page 22-65) R H/L HIGH (GRN)

poor ground (G501, G502).H
R H/L HIGH (GRN)
RIGHT HEADLIGHT 3P CONNECTOR

W ire side offemale terminals
Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?
YES-Go to step 17.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the right
headlight (high beam) and the under-dash fuse/relay
bo xM
17. Check for continuity between the left headlight 3P DTC B1275: Head Light Switch OFF Position
connector terminal No. 3 and under-dash fuse/relay
Circuit Malfunction
box connector B (36P) terminal No. 13.
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR B (36P) DTC B1276; Head Light Switch Parking
Wire side offemale terminals Position Circuit Malfunction
L H/L HIGH (GRY)
DTC B1278: Head Light ON Position Circuit
Malfunction
H H z s e J Z H r^?i7nii
l * II u IX I 0 I p I / I u I I 15
m JlV|l80 1201211^ 1 —7
[g[24|sl2g|X|a|^l [a|3l|32l^|ai]%||X
ON (II).
L H/L HIGH (GRY)
3. Turn the combination light switch to the PARKING
LEFT HEADLIGHT 3P CONNECTOR and ON (low beam) positions for at least 6 seconds in
Wire side of female terminals each position, and then to the OFF position.
Is th e re c o n tin u ity ? 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 18. A r e D T C 's B 1 2 7 5 , B 1 2 7 6 , a n d / o r B 1 2 7 8 in d ic a te d ?
NO-Repair open in the wire between the left headlight YES-Go to step 5.
(high beam) and the under-dash fuse/relay b o x M
18. Check for continuity between each headlight 3P Check for loose or poor connections.®
5. Select LIGHTING from the BODY ELECTRICAL system
select menu, and enter DATA LIST.
HEADLIGHT 3P CONNECTOR
GND (BLK)
YES-Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/relay
box.H
(cont'd)
6. Check each combination light switch position value 12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
with the DATA LIST menu.
When the combination light switch is turned OFF: (34P).
Data List Value 14. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay
Headlight Switch (OFF) ON box connector M (34P) terminals No. 5, No. 7 , and
Headlight Switch (PARKING) OFF No. 8 and body ground individually.
Headlight Switch (HEADLIGHT) OFF
When the combination light switch is turned to UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR M (34P)
PARKING:
PARKING LTSW (GRY)
Data List Value H/L ON SW (RED) H/L OFF SW (BLU)
Headlight Switch (OFF) OFF
Headlight Switch (PARKING) ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 / 20 21 / 23 24 / / / / / / / / 33 34
When the combination light switch is turned ON
(HEADLIGHT):
Data List Value
Headlight Switch (OFF) OFF Wire side offemale terminals
Headlight Switch (PARKING) ON
Headlight Switch (HEADLIGHT) ON
A r e a ll d a ta lis t v a lu e s c o r re c t?
YES-Repair a short to ground in the wires.®
box.® NO-Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/relay
box.®
NO-Go to step 7.
16. Do the combination light switch test (see page
8. Disconnect the combination light switch 12P 22-198).
connector.
Is th e c o m b in a tio n lig h t s w itc h O K ?
YES-Go to step 17.
10. Select LIGHTING from the BODY ELECTRICAL system
select menu, and enter DATA LIST. NO-Replace the combination light switch.®
11. Check each combination light switch position value 17. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector M
with the DATA LIST menu. (34P).
When the combination light switch is turned OFF:

Data List Value
Headlight Switch (OFF) OFF
Headlight Switch (PARKING) OFF
A r e a ll d a ta lis t v a lu e s in d ic a t e d O F F ?
YES-Go to step 15.
NO-Go to step 12.
18. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay DTC B1279; Dimmer Switch Circuit
box connector M (34P) terminals and the combination
Malfunction
light switch 12P connector terminals as shown:
Under-dash Combination light to follow the instruction in B-CAN System Diagnosis
fuse/relay box switch 12P connector Test Mode A (see page 22-107).
connector M (34P)
5 10 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
7 11
8 9
ON (II).
33 12
3. Turn the combination light (headlight) switch ON.
COMBINATI ON LIGHT SWITCH 12P CONNECTOR
Wire side of female terminals 4. Change the dimmer switch from low beam to high
beam.
1 2 / 4 / 6
8 9 10 11 12 5. Turn the combination light switch OFF and then to the
/
H/L OFF SW (BLU) GND (BLK) passing position, and wait for at least 6 seconds.
H/L ON SW PARKING LTSW 6. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
(RED) (GRY)
Is D T C B 1 2 7 9 in d ic a te d ?
PARKING LT YES-Go to step 7.

SW(GRY)
H/L ON SW (RED) H/L OFF SW (BLU) NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Check for loose or poor connections.®
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 / 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 / 20 21 / 23 24 / / / / / / / / 33 34 7. Select LIGHTING from the BODY ELECTRICAL system
GND (BLK) select menu, then enter the DATA LIST.
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR M (34P) 8. Check each combination light switch position value
When the passing switch is operated
YES-Go to step 19.
Data List Value
NO-Repair open in the w ires.! Headlight Switch (PASSING) ON
Headlight Switch (High beam) OFF
box connector M (34P) terminals as shown: When the headlight switch is turned ON, and the
dimmer switch changed from low beam to high
From terminal To terminal beam
8 3,4, 7, 5
7 3, 4,5 Data List Value
Headlight Switch (PASSING) OFF
Is th e re c o n tin u ity ? Headlight Switch (High beam) ON
YES-Repair short between the wires.® Headlight Switch (HEADLIGHT) ON
A r e a ll d a ta lis t v a lu e s c o rre c t?
box.B YES-Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/relay
• USA models (see page 22-65) box.B
• Canada models (see page 22-66) • USA models (see page 22-65)
(cont'd)
9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 17. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
10. Disconnect the combination light switch 12P 18. Do the combination light switch test (see page
connector. 22-198).
11 .Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Is th e c o m b in a tio n lig h t s w itc h O K ?
12. Select LIGHTING from the BODY ELECTRICAL system YES-Go to step 19.
select menu, then enter the DATA LIST.
NO-Replace the combination light switch.■
13. Check each combination light switch position value
(34P).
When the combination light switch is turned OFF
20. Check for continuity between the under-dash
Data List Value fuse/relay box connector M (34P) terminals and the
Headlight Switch (PASSING) OFF combination light switch 12P connector terminals as
Headlight Switch (High beam) OFF shown:
Under-dash Combination light
A r e a ll d a ta lis t v a lu e s in d ic a t e d O F F ? switch 12P connector
fuse/relay box
YES-Go to step 17. connector M (34P)
3 4
NO-Go to step 14. 4 6
14. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 5 10
33 12
(34P). COMBI NATION LIGHT SWITCH 12P CONNECTOR
16. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay DIMMER SW (LT BLU) PASSING SW
box connector M (34P) terminals No. 3, No. 4, and
No. 5 and body ground individually. 1 2 / 4 / 6
/ 8 9 10 11 12
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR IVK(34P) H/L ON SW COMBI GND (BLK)
(RED)
PASSING SW H/L ON SW
(WHT) (RED)
PASSING SW H/L ON SW
DIMMER SW (WHT) (RED)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 / 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 / 20 21 / 23 24 / 33 34
—JL—
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 / 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
DIMMER SW
(LT BLU)
18 / 2 0 21 / 23 24 / / / / / / / / 33 34

Wire side of fema l e terminal s
Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? YES-Go to step 21.
YES-Repair short to ground in the wires.H NO-Repair open in the wire.H
box.H
box connector M (34P) terminals as shown:
From terminal To terminal

5 3, 4, 7, 8
7 3, 4,8
8 3,4
Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?
YES-Repair short between the w ire s .!
boxM
MICU Input Test
NOTE: Before performing the input tests, check the No. 1, No. 5, No. 15, No. 22, No. 24, No. 28, No. 29, No. 32, No. 34,
No. 48, and No. 51 fuses in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
3. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connectors A, B, C, K, M, N, Q, R, S, and W.
GRY LT GRN GRY
3—
WHT GRN BRN GRY LT GRN
WHT
CONNECTOR C (49P)
GRN LT GRN
1717171 \7UW ITH

r— 71 [alal/T
\/1
\a \£ z |2 4 |/j2 6 | 1 / IX l*y| — 7!
GRY
CONNECTOR K(10P) CONNECTOR M (34P) CONNECTOR N (8P)
LT BLU WHT RED GRY BLU BLK BLK

n— i_ it_j i_a_ i_i uue • j i__ __ii__ _r
1 2 r—i 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 / 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1 .r-ri . 2
5 6 7 18 10 18 / 20 21 / 23 24 / / / / / / / / 33 34 4 5|6 7 8
BLK
7
BLK GRY
CONNECTOR Q (16P) CONNECTOR R (28P) CONNECTOR S (3P)
LT GRN WHT ORN CONNECTOR W (IP)

n— _n
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 V ////////////
9 10 11 / 13 14 / 16 // / 20 21 ///// //3 3 ^
YEL
BLK LT BLU GRN
Cavity Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if result is not
obtained
A24 PNK Ignition switch ON (II) Connect terminals W1 and A24 • Blown bulb
with a jumper wire: • Poor ground (G201) or an
The right headlight (low beam) open in the ground wire
should come on. • An open or high resistance
in the wire
A30 GRN Ignition switch ON (II) Connect terminals W1 and A30 • Blown bulb
with a jumper wire: • Poor ground(G201) or an
The right headlight (high beam) open in the ground wire
in the wire
B29 BRN Ignition switch ON (II) Connect terminals W1 and B29 • Blown bulb
The left headlight (low beam) open in the ground wire
in the wire
B13 GRY Ignition switch ON (II) Connect terminals W1 and B13 • Blown bulb
The left headlight (high beam) open in the ground wire
in the wire
A8 GRY Ignition switch ON (II) Connect terminals W1 and A8 • Blown bulb
The right front parking/side open in the ground wire
marker light should come on. • An open or high resistance
in the wire
B30 GRY Ignition switch ON (II) Connect terminals W1 and B30 • Blown bulb
The left front parking/side open in the ground wire
marker light should come on. • An open or high resistance
in the wire
C42 GRY Ignition switch ON (II) Connect terminals W1 and C42 • Blown bulb
with a jumper wire: • Poor ground (G602, G604)
The taillights and license plate or an open in the ground
lights should come on. wire
in the wire
C21 GRN Ignition switch ON (II) Connect terminals W1 and C21 • Blown bulb
with a jumper wire: • Poor ground (G602, G604)
The back-up lights should come or an open in the ground
on. wire
in the wire
(cont'd)

7. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box, and do these input tests at the following connectors.
• If all the input tests prove OK, the MICUmust be faulty; replace the under-dash fuse/relay box (see page 22-65).
obtained
N2 BLK In all ignition switch Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G501)
positions There should be less than 0.2 V. • An open or high resistance
in the wire
K10 BLK In all ignition switch Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G502)
in the wire
M16 BLK In all ignition switch Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G501)
in the wire
Q9 BLK In all ignition switch Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G502)
in the wire
M8 BLU Combination light Measure the voltage between • Faulty combination light
switch OFF terminals M8 and M33: switch
M33 BLK There should be less than 0.2 V. • An open or high resistance
in the wire
Combination light Measure the voltage between • Faulty combination light
switch in any other terminals M8 and M33: switch
position than OFF There should be about 5 V or • A short in the wire
more.
M7 GRY Combination light Measure the voltage between • Faulty combination light
switch (parking terminals M7 and M33: switch
M33 BLK position) ON There should be less than 0.2 V. • An open or high resistance
in the wire
There should be about 5 V or • Ashort inthe wire
more.
M5 RED Combination light Measure the voltage between • Faulty combination light
switch (headlight) ON terminals M5 and M33: switch
in the wire
There should be about 5 V or • A short in the wire
more.
obtained
M4 WHT Combination light Measure the voltage between • Faulty combination light
switch lever pulled terminals M4 and M33: switch
M33 BLK (Passing) There should be less than 0.2 V. • An open or high resistance
in the wire
switch lever released terminals M4 and M33: switch
(OFF) There should be about 5 V or • Ashort inthe wire
more.
M3 LT Combination light Measure the voltage between • Faulty combination light
BLU switch (Dimmer) in terminals M3 and M33: switch
M33 high beam position There should be less than 0.2 V. • An open or high resistance
BLK in the wire
switch (Dimmer) in low terminals M3 and M33: switch
beam position There should be about 5 V or • A short in the wire
more.
C21 GRN Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty back-up light switch
and shift lever in R There should be battery voltage. (M/T)
position • Faulty MICU
• Blown No. 5 (10 A) fuse in
the under-dash fuse/relay
box
in the wire
B26 GRN Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty MICU
(A/T) There should be battery voltage. • Blown No. 60 (50 A) fuse in
box
• Blown No. 5 (10 A) fuse in
box
in the wire
R21 GRN Fog light switch ON Measure the voltage between • Faulty combination light
terminals R21 and M33: switch
in the wire
Fog light switch OFF Measure the voltage between • Faulty combination light
terminals R21 and M33: switch
There should be about 5 V or • A short in the wire
more.
R20 LT Under all condition Connect the terminal R20 and • Faulty fog light relay
BLU body ground: • Blown No. 9 (20 A) fuse in
The fog lights should come on. the under-dash fuse/relay
box
• Blown bulb
in the wire
Combination Light Switch Test/Replacement
1. Remove the steering column covers (see page 20-105).

2. Disconnect the 12P connector (A) from the combination light switch (B).
1 2 / 4 / 6
/ 8 9 10 11 12
3. Turn the steering wheel to access the combination light switch screws (C).
4. Remove the two screws, then slide out the combination light switch.
5. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
• If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system.
• If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the tables.
Light switch
Terminal
4 9 10 6 12 11
Position
\
OFF 0 — — O
£): — o
Headlight switch LOW o— — o — — o
10
h ig h o— — 0 — — o
O— — 0
OFF
Passing switch
ON o—— 0
Turn signal switch
\ Terminal
1 2 12
Position \
LEFT — 0
Neutral
r \
RIGHT \J U
Fog light switch

\ Terminal
8 12
Position
OFF
ON O — — O
6. If all the continuity is not as specified, remove the two screws and replace the switch.
7. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.
Headlight Adjustment
A CAUTION 3. Measure the height of the headlight's center mark (A),

then on the wall or screen (B), mark the same height
Headlights become very hot during use; do not touch
of the headlights with masking tape in a straight
them or any attaching hardware immediately after
horizontal line (C).
they have been turned off.
Before adjusting the headlights:

• Park the vehicle on a level surface.
• Make sure the tire pressures are correct.
• The driver or someone who weighs the same should
sit in the driver's seat (or an equivalent amount of
weight).
1. Clean the outer lens so that you can see the center
mark (A) of the headlights.
4. Turn on the low beam headlights.

5. To see if the headlights are adjusted properly,
observe the beams of light projected on the wall or
screen. The highest edge or "cut line" (A) of the
headlights should be equal with the masking tape (B).
NOTE: To help determine which headlight is out of
adjustment, block one of the beams with a large piece
of cardboard or equivalent, and observe the other
beam on the wall or screen. Repeat this for the other
headlight.
A
2. Park the vehicle so that the center mark of the

headlight (A) is 7.5 m (25 ft) away from a wall or
screen (B).
Headlight Replacement
6. If necessary, open the hood and adjust the headlights 1. Remove the front bumper (see page 20-144).
by turning the vertical adjuster (A).
2. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the headlight (B).
NOTE: The R and L adjusters are not applicable for U.
S. models. The headlights can only be adjusted up
and down.
3. Remove the four mounting bolts (C) from the

headlight.
4. Remove the bolt (D) and the front bumper upper
beam (E).
6. After replacement, adjust the headlights (see page
22- 200 ).
Bulb Replacement
Headlight Front Parking/Side marker Light

1. Disconnect the 3P connector (A), then remove the 1. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the front
rubber cap (B) from the headlight. parking/side marker light.
Front Parking/Side marker Light: 5 W
B
2. Turn the bulb socket (B) 45 ° counterclockwise to

2. Pull the retaining spring (A) away from the bulb (B), remove the bulb (C) from the headlight housing.
then remove the bulb.
3. Install a new bulb in the reverse order of removal,
Headlight: 55/60 W
A
3. Install a new bulb in the reverse order of removal.

Front Turn Signal Light Taillights
1. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the front turn 1. Open the tailgate and remove the maintenance lid (A).
signal light.
Front Turn Signal Light: 21 W
2. Turn the bulb socket (B) 45 ° counterclockwise to 3. Turn the bulb socket (A) 45 ° counterclockwise to
remove the bulb (C) from the headlight housing. remove the bulb (B).
3. Install a new bulb in the reverse order of removal Brake Light/Taillight: 21/5 W
Rear Turn Signal Light: 21 W
Back-up Light: 16 W
4. Install new bulb(s) in the reverse order of removal,

and tighten the nuts to 5 N-m (0.5 kgfm, 4 Ibfft).
Bulb Replacement (cont'd) Fog Light Replacement
Fog Light *09-11 models

1. Remove the fog light from the front bumper (see page 1. Remove the mounting screw, then pull out the fog
22-204). light (A) from the front bumper.
2. Turn the bulb socket (A) 45 ° counterclockwise to
remove it from the housing.
Fog Light: 55 W
*09-11 models
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (B), then remove the fog

light
3. Install the light in the reverse order of removal.
4. After replacement, adjust the fog lights (see page
22-205).
*12 model
3. Install a new bulb in the reverse order of removal.

Fog Light Adjustment
'12 model Before adjusting the fog lights:

• Park the vehicle on a level surface.
1. Put a shop towel in the opening between the lower
• Make sure the tire pressures are correct.
edge of the cap (A) and the fog light (B) to prevent
scratches. Insert a flat-tip screwdriver wrapped with • The driver or someone who weighs the same should
protective tape into the slot (C), and remove the cap, sit in the driver's seat.
• Unload the vehicle.
The fog lights should aim down slightly. To check for
proper adjustment:
1. Park the vehicle in front of a wall (A).
2. Remove the mounting screw, then pull out the fog

light (A) from the front bumper.
2. Turn the fog lights on.

3. Determine if the fog lights are aimed properly:
• Measure the height of the fog lights (B).
• On the wall, mark the height of the fog lights with a
piece of tape (C).
• Check each fog light beam’s height. Adjust them
both so they are approximately 4.5 cm (1.77 in)
■
lower (D) than the height of the fog lights at a
distance of 3 m (10 ft).
For example, if the vehicle is parked 3 m (10 ft) from
B the screen, the top of the fog light beam should be
3. Disconnect the 2P connector (B), then remove the fog 4.5 cm (1.77 in) below the tape mark.
light.
5. After replacement, adjust the fog lights (see page
22-205).
(cont'd)
Fog Light Adjustment (cont'd) Taillight Replacement
4. Adjust each fog light by turning the adjuster (A), 1. Open the tailgate and remove the maintenance lid.
'09-11 models 2. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the taillights (B),
'12 model 3. Remove the mounting nuts from the taillight

4. Install the taillight in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: Adjust the fog lights to illuminate lower than

the specified value of height
License Plate Light Replacement High Mount Brake Light
Replacement
1. Push the license plate light (A) to the side to release 1. Open the tailgate.
the retaining spring, and pull out the license plate
2. Push in the clips (A), and remove the cover (B) from
light
the high mount brake light (C).
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the tailgate.
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the light

License Plate Light: 5 W
3. Disconnect the 2P connector (D).
4. Remove the two mounting bolts and the high mount
brake light
5. Install the high mount brake light in the reverse order
of removal.
3. Separate the license plate light lens (B) and the

housing (C), then remove the bulb (D).
4. Install the license plate light in the reverse order of
removal.
Brake Pedal Position Switch Test
1. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the brake pedal

position switch (B).
2. Check for continuity between terminals No. 1 and

No. 2.
• There should be continuity when the brake pedal is
pressed.
• There should be no continuity when the brake pedal
is released.
No. 4.
• There should be no continuity when the brake pedal
is pressed.
• There should be continuity when the brake pedal is
released.
4. If the test results are not as specified,adjust the switch
or adjust the pedal height (see page 19-6).If the
results are still not as specified, replace the switch.
TURN SIGNAL INDICATORS
MICU
(Built into the under-dash fuse/relay box)
Input Test, page 22-214
Circuit Diagram
BATTERY TERMINAL
FUSE BOX IGNITION SWITCH
No. 1 (100 A) N o. 6 0 (IGN) (5 0 A)

-ctvjd- --- cr\_j3— —
No. 3 (20 A) 823 IG1 HOT in ON (II)
— crxx>- a n d START (III)
No. 23 I N o. 1
(10 A) (10 A)
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
TURN SIGNAL/HAZARD WARNING CIRCUIT
BLU
BLU WHT
v ____ v
TURN SIGNAL
INDICATOR
2 1 1 2
LEFT LEFT RIGHT RIGHT

REAR FRONT FRONT REAR
TURN TURN TURN TURN
SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL
LIGHT LIGHT LIGHT LIGHT
(21 W) (21 W) (21 W ) (21 W)
BLK BLK
1 1 i i
G201 G 604
YEL
N o. 2 9 (1 0 A) FUSE
UNDER-DASH (UNDER-D A SH
W1 FUSE/RELAY BOX FUSE/RELAY BOX)
_
No. 22 (7.5 A)
c r\jo ----
MICU
N5
-YEL-
Y
HAZARD
LIGHT
SG PG d r 12 W)
WARNING
SWITCH
Q13
rf -P N K -
M33 M 16 N2 K10
BLK LT GRN BRN

RED
12 2 1
TURN DASH LIGHTS

Q P SIGNAL BRIGHTNESS
LEFT x X 7 RIGHT
LIGHT CONTROLLER
(In t h e g a u g e
c o ntrol m o d u le )
CONBINATION LIGHT SWITCH
BLK BLK BLK BLK
1 i I i
G 502 G 501 G501 G 502
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC B1280: Turn Signal Switch Circuit 7. Disconnect the combination light switch 12P
connector.
Malfunction
8. Check each turn signal switch position value with the
DATA LIST menu.
ON (II). When the turn signal switch is in neutral position:
Data List Value
3. Operate the turn signal switch in left and right OFF
Turn Signal Switch (LEFT)
positions, and wait for at least 6 seconds. OFF
Turn Signal Switch (RIGHT)
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. A r e b o th v a lu e s n o w s h o w in g O F F ?
Is D T C B 1 2 8 0 in d ic a t e d ? YES-Replace the combination light switch (see page
YES-Go to step 5. 22-198).
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. NO-Go to step 9.

Check for loose or poor connections.® 9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
5. Select LIGHTING from the BODY ELECTRICAL system 10. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector M
select menu, then enter the DATA LIST. (34P).
6. Check each turn signal switch position value with the 11. Check for continuity between body ground and
DATA LIST menu. under-dash fuse/relay box connector M (34P)
terminals No. 2 and No. 6 individually.
When the turn signal switch is in left position:
Data List Value
Turn Signal Switch (LEFT) ON
Turn Signal Switch (RIGHT) OFF LEFT
(LT GRN) RIGHT (BRN)
When the turn signal switch is in right position:
Data List Value 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 / 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 / 20 21 / 23 24 33 34
Turn Signal Switch (LEFT) OFF
Turn Signal Switch (RIGHT) ON
A r e a ll d a ta lis t v a lu e s c o r re c t?
box.B W i re side offemale terminals
• Canada models (see page 22-66) Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?
NO-Go to step 7. YES-Repair short to ground in the wires.H
NO-Go to step 12.
13. Do the combination light switch test (see page
22-198).
Is th e c o m b in a tio n lig h t s w itc h O K ?
YES-Go to step 14.
NO-Replace the combination light switch, (see page
22-198)
(34P).
15. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay 16. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay
box connector M (34P) terminals No. 2, No. 6 and No. box connector M (34P) terminals No. 2 and No. 33,
33 and combination light switch 12P connector and between connector (34P) terminals No. 6 and No.
terminals No. 2, No. 1, and No. 12. 33 individually.
COMBINATION LIGHT SWITCH 12P CONNECTOR UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR IVI (34P)
LEFT (LT GRN)

RIGHT (BRN)
RIGHT (BRN)
1 2 / 4 / 6 LEFT (LT GRN)
/ 8 9 10 11 12
GND(BLK)
GND
(BLK)
LEFT
(LT GRN) RIGHT (BRN)
3___ _c2_
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 / 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?
R F|
18 / 20 21 / 23
C
/ / / / / / / / 33 34
N |
GND(BLK)
YES-Repair a short in the wires.
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR IVI (34P) NO-Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/relay
Wire side of female terminals box.
Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? • USA models (see page 22-65)
YES-Go to step 16. • Canada models (see page 22-66)
NO-Repair an open in the wire.

MICU Input Test
NOTE: Before testing, check the No. 1 (10 A), No. 22 (7.5 A), and No. 23 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
1.Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors A, B, C, K, M, N, Q, and W.
1037203 0707§0 M I ft
- 116 [ / 1 1 8 1 1/1/121 K —,71
l / l / l ? l l1 t |1 T |1 8 |/| |2 0 |2 1 |Z Z |
|gj|gi|as| |29| |30|/|3Z|/1»l|35|l/
WHT BLU
CONNECTOR C (49P)
BLU
R»Ti5p17R
r~ 7J
i ||i|22[/i
Z1 |ZZ|/1 Im4I/|/l2I j6®|!
|2 l/l/lial
1 /1 /1 ^ 1
X l | 3 l ja 2 ^ l/l3 5 [3 6 ] [43|7 |4 i|4b |47 h
WHT
CONNECTOR K (10P) CONNECTOR M (34P)

LT GRN BRN BLK
ElL
n_ _
i JU C I — __r
1 2 .r —i 3 1 2 4
5 6 7 8 / 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
5 6 7 18 / 10 18 / 20 21 / 23 24 / / 33 34
BLK BLU
7 BLK
CONNECTOR N (8P) CONNECTOR Q(16P) CONNECTOR W (1P)

BLK WHT
1 2 3
i— i 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 / 8
ITT
i»
4 5j6 9 10 11 / 13 14 / 16
YEL
7 r
BLK
^
PNK YEL
Cavity Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if desired result
is not obtained
B23 WHT Under all conditions Measure the voltage to • Blown No. 3 (20 A) fuse in the
ground: battery terminal box
There should be battery • An open or high resistance in
voltage. the wire
W1 YEL Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to • Blown No. 60 (50 A) fuse in the
ground: under-dash fuse/relay box
There should be battery • An open or high resistance in
voltage. the wire
B34 BLU Under all conditions Connect terminals B23 and • Poor ground (G301) or an
B34 with a jumper wire: open in the ground wire
The left front turn signal light • Blown bulb
should come on. • An open or high resistance in
the wire
C13 BLU Under all conditions Connect terminals B23 and • Poor ground (G602) or an
C13 with a jumper wire: open in the ground wire
The left rear turn signal light • Blown bulb
the wire
A28 WHT Under all conditions Connect terminals B23 and • Poor ground (G201) or an
A28 with a jumper wire: open in the ground wire
The right front turn signal • Blown bulb
light should come on. • An open or high resistance in
the wire
C41 WHT Under all conditions Connect terminals B23 and • Poor ground (G604) or an
C41 with a jumper wire: open in the ground wire
The right rear turn signal light • Blown bulb
the wire
M20 BLU Under all conditions Connect terminals B23 and • Faulty gauge control module
M20 with a jumper wire: • An open or high resistance in
The left turn signal indicator the wire
should come on. • Poor ground (G501) or an
Q6 WHT Under all conditions Connect terminals B23 and Q6 • Faulty gauge control module
with a jumper wire: • An open or high resistance in
The right turn signal indicator the wire
should come on. • Poor ground (G501) or an
(cont'd)
5. Reconnect the connectors to the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box, and do these input tests at the following
connectors.
® If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
is not obtained
K10 BLK In all ignition switch Measure the voltage to • Poor ground (G502)
positions ground: • An open or high resistance in
There should be less than the wire
0.2 V.
N2 BLK In all ignition switch Measure the voltage to • Poor ground (G501)
0.2 V.
M16 BLK In all ignition switch Measure the voltage to • Poor ground (G501)
0.2 V.
Q9 BLK In all ignition switch Measure the voltage to • Poor ground (G502)
0.2 V.
N5 YEL Under all conditions Measure the voltage to • Faulty under-dash fuse/relay
ground: box
There should be battery • A short to ground in the wire
voltage.
Q13 PNK Hazard warning switch Measure the voltage to • Faulty hazard warning switch
pressed ground: • An open or high resistance in
There should be battery the wire
voltage.
M2 LT GRN Ignition switch ON (II), Measure the voltage between • Faulty combination light
turn signal switch in left terminals M2 and M33: switch
M33 BLK position There should be less than • An open or high resistance in
0.2 V. the wire
Ignition switch ON (II), Measure the voltage between • Faulty combination light
turn signal switch in terminals M2 and M33: switch
right or neutral position There should be about 5 V or • A short to ground in the wire
more.
M6 BRN Ignition switch ON (II), Measure the voltage between • Faulty combination light
turn signal switch in terminals M6 and M33: switch
M33 BLK right position There should be less than • An open or high resistance in
0.2 V. the wire
Ignition switch ON (II), Measure the voltage between • Faulty combination light
turn signal switch in left terminals M6 and M33: switch
or neutral position There should be about 5 V or • A short to ground in the wire
more.
Hazard Warning Switch Test/Replacement
1. Remove the audio panel.

• With navigation unit (see page 23-154)
• Without navigation unit (see page 23-67)
2. Remove the two screws and the hazard warning
switch (A).
3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each

switch position according to the table.
1 2 4 5
o- -o
I CM-o o- -o
4. If the continuity is not as specified for terminals 1 and
2, replace the switch (A). If the continuity is not as
specified for terminals 4 and 5, replace the bulb (B).
5. Install the switch in the reverse order of removal.

Circuit Diagram
*: '12 m o d e l
N o. 2 9 (10 A) MICU
--CfXjO-
BATTERY TERMINAL
FUSE BOX
No. 1 (1 0 0 A) N o . 1 (1 0 A)
-W H T - — < r \j o —
(±> _ ~ c r\jD —
G5 C37
PNK GRY
PNK
r PNK PNK
1 2 1
CONSOLE
0 (8 W ) a)d.4W) BOX
LIGHT*
C?) (8 '
N) 0 ( 8 W )
ON .A OFF <|)(5W)
1
OFF A O N ON X OFF a
o \ d RED
T 1 CEILING 2 CARGO
LIGHT AREA
FRONT LIGHT
j i M ni\/ i m iai
DASH LIGHTS
MAP LIGHT BRIGHTNESS
CONTROLLER
(In th e g a u g e
con trol m o d u le )
UNDER -D ASH FUSE/RELAY BOX C 18
MICU
DRIVE CIRCUIT DRIVE CIRCUIT
— x — — I —
C32 C40 C26
LT GRN BLU GRN PNK ORN
FRONT DRIVER'S RIGHT REAR LEFT REAR 2 TAILGATE

P ASSENG E R'S DOOR SWITCH DOOR SWITCH DOOR SWITCH LATCH SWITCH
DOOR SWITCH (C lo se d : (C lo se d : (C lo s e d : (C lo s e d :
(C lo se d : D o o r open) Door op en ) D oor o p e n ) T a ilg a te o p e n )
D oor open) BLK
I
G 602
Front Individual Map Light Test/Replacement
With navigation Without navigation

1. Turn the individual map light switch OFF. 1. Turn the individual map light switch OFF.
2. Carefully pry the lens (A) off with a small screwdriver. 2. Carefully pry the lens (A) off with a small screwdriver.
Individual Map Light: 8Wx2 Individual Map Light: 8Wx2
3. Remove the screws, then remove the individual map

3. Remove the two screws, then remove the individual light (B).
map light (B). 4. Disconnect the connector (C) from the individual map
4. Disconnect the connectors (C) from the individual light.
map light. 5. Check for continuity between the terminals.
5. Check for continuity between the terminals. • There should be continuity between terminal No. 1
and the ground terminal with the switch in the ON
• There should be continuity between terminal No. 1
and the ground terminal with the switch in the ON position.
position. • There should be no continuity between terminal
No. 1 and the ground terminal with the switch in the
• There should be no continuity between terminal
No. 1 and the ground terminal with the switch in the OFF position.
OFF position. 6. If the continuity is not as specified, check the bulb. If
6. If the continuity is not as specified, check the bulb. If the bulb is OK, replace the individual map light.
the bulb is OK, replace the individual map light. 7. Install the light in the reverse order of removal.
Ceiling Light Test/Replacement Cargo Area Light Test/Replacement
1.Turn the ceiling light switch OFF. 1. Open the tailgate.

2. Carefully pry the lens (A) off with a small screwdriver. 2. Carefully pry out the cargo area light (A).
Ceiling Light: 8 W Cargo Area Light: 5 W
3. Disconnect the 2P connector (B) from the cargo area

light.
4. Check for continuity between terminals No. 1 ( + ) and
No. 2 ( —). There should be continuity. If there is no
continuity, check the bulb. If the bulb is OK, replace
the cargo area light assembly.
3. Remove the screws, then remove the ceiling light (B).
4. Disconnect the 3P connector (C) from the ceiling light.
and No. 2 with the switch in the MIDDLE (DOOR)
position.
and body ground with the switch in the ON position.
No. 1 and No. 2, and between terminals No. 2 and
body ground with the switch in the OFF position.
6. If the continuity is not as specified, check the bulb. If
the bulb is OK, replace the ceiling light.
Console Box Light Replacement Tailgate Latch Switch Test
1. Remove the dashboard center lower cover (see page 1. Open the tailgate.
20-99).
2. Remove the tailgate lower trim panel (see page
2. Twist the socket (A) to remove it from the dashboard 20-78).
center lower cover (B).
3. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the tailgate
Console Box Light: 1.4 W latch assembly (B).
3. Remove the bulb (C) from the socket.

4. Install the light in the reverse order of removal. No. 2.
• There should be continuity with the tailgate open.
• There should be no continuity with the tailgate
closed.
5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the tailgate
latch assembly (see page 20-161).
Test/Replacement, page 22-221

Circuit Diagram

FUSE BOX FUSE/RELAY BOX
KEYLESS RECEIVER UNIT r

(Built in to t h e
i m m o b iliz e r -k e y le s s
con trol unit)
B-CAN
Q l)(5 W )
2 CARGO
I AREA
I
I LIGHT
I
BLU L LT GRN PUR
I
I
G7 I C18
I
j Q3
IG1 B-CAN
DRIVE CIRCUIT DRIVE CIRCUIT
[ 1 [ ] [
] I ] [ ]
M 16 Q9 N2 K10 M 34
C32 C33 C40 C26 E2 C22

!
BLK LT GRN GRY BRN ORN
I DOOR LOCK
KNOB
IMMOBILIZER
KEYLESS DRIVER'S
1 CONTROL cx /6 DOOR
UNIT LOCK
LOCK 0 L° CK KNOB
2
SWITCH
FRONT DRIVER'S RIGHT REAR LEFT REAR IGNITION TAILGATE
PASSENG ER'S DOOR DOOR DOOR KEY SWITCH DRIVER'S LATCH
DOOR SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH ( C lo s e d ; DOOR LATCH SWITCH
(C lo s e d : (C lo se d : (C lo se d : (C lo se d : Key inserted) (C losed :
D oor o p e n ) D oor o p e n ) D oor o p e n ) D oor o p e n ) T ailg ate
open)
BLK BLK BLK
_Q_ _u_ JJ_ _G l 1 1 1

G501 G502 G501 G 502 G 501 G501 G602
MICU Input Test
NOTE: Before testing, check for No. 22 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors C, E, G, K, M, N, Q, and W.
CONNECTOR C (49P)
PNK PUR
7 9 |1 0 |/
1241 / | 261
13 14
A V
18
I/V l2 9 |
/ 20
37 38| 39|40 41 42 43 / |4 5 |4 6 47 48 /
LT GRN BLU ORN PNK GRN
CONNECTOR E (12P) CONNECTOR G (8P) CONNECTOR K(10P)
BRN
_n_, _n_, i_ r
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 ,--- , 3 /
CD 10
00
/ 8 9 / / / 5 7 / L_J
j
RED PNK BLU BLK
CONNECTOR IVI (34P)

BLK
i_ _E3_ _cI* i l ri _c3__ __ri /

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 / 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 / 20 21 / 23 24 / / / / / / / / 33 34
GRY
CONNECTOR N (8P) CONNECTOR Q (16P) CONNECTOR W (IP )

BLK
__r "i __r
1 i— i 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4 5 6 7 8
j— L
9 10 11 / 13 14 / 16
?
YEL
BLK
5. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay b o x , and do these input tests at the following connectors.
Cavity W ire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if desired result
is not obtained
K10 BLK I n all ignition switch Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G502)
positions There should be less than 0.2 V. • An open or high resistance in
the wire
the wire
the wire
the wire
W1 YEL Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 60 (50 A) fuse in
There should be battery voltage. the under-dash fuse/relay
box
the wire
There should be less than 0.2 V. • Faulty driver's door switch
ground
the wire
There should be about 5 V or • A short to ground in the wire
more.
C32 LT GRN Front passenger's Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty front passenger's door
door open There should be less than 0.2 V. switch
• Faulty front passenger's door
switch ground
the wire
Front passenger's Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty front passenger's door
door closed There shou l d be about 5 V or switch
more. • A short to ground in the wire
C40 GRN Right rear door open Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty right rear door switch
There should be less than 0.2 V. • Faulty right rear door switch
ground
the wire
Right rear door closed Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty right rear door switch
more.
C26 PNK Left rear door open Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty left rear door switch
There should be less than 0.2 V. • Faulty left rear door switch
ground
the wire
Left rear door closed Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty left rear door switch
more.
is not obtained
C22 ORN Tailgate open Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G602) or an
There should be less than 0.2 V. open in the ground wire
• Faulty tailgate latch switch
the wire
Tailgate closed Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty tailgate latch switch
more.
There should be no continuity
into the ignition switch There should be less than 0.2 V. open in the ground wire
• Faulty ignition key switch
the wire
Ignition switch LOCK Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty ignition key switch
(0), and the ignition There should be about 5 V or • A short to ground in the wire
key removed from the more.
ignition switch
E2 BRN Driver’s door lock Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G501) or an
UNLOCK • Faulty driver's door lock knob
switch
the wire
Driver's door lock Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty driver's door lock knob
knob switch in neutral There should be about 5 V or switch
or LOCK more. • A short to ground in the wire
E9 RED Driver's door lock Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G501) or an
knob switch in LOCK There should be less than 0.2 V. open in the ground wire
• Faulty driver's door lock knob
switch
the wire
Driver's door lock Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty driver's door lock knob
knob switch in neutral There should be about 5 V or switch
or UNLOCK more. • A short to ground in the wire
G7 BLU Ceiling light switch in Connect terminal G7 and body • Blown No. 1 (10 A) fuse in the
middle position ground with a jumper wire: under-dash fuse/relay box
The ceiling light should come on. • Faulty ceiling light
• Blown bulb
the wire
C18 PUR Under all conditions Connect terminal C18 and body • Blown No. 1 (10 A) fuse in the
ground with a jumper wire: under-dash fuse/relay box
The cargo area light should come • Faulty cargo area light
on. • Blown bulb
the wire
Ignition Key Switch Test
NOTE: SRS components are located in this area. Review

repairing or servicing.
1. Remove the steering column upper and lower covers
(see page 20-105).
2. Disconnect the steering lock 6P connector (A).

No. 2.
• There should be continuity with the key in the
ignition switch.
• There should be no continuity with the key
removed.
4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the
steering lock (see page 17-16).
Test, page 22-239

System Description
Anti-pinch Power Window Operation

The system is composed of the power window control unit (built into the power window master switch) and the driver's
power window motor.
The driver's power window motor incorporates a Hall 1C unit (pulser) which generates pulses during the motor's
operation and sends pulses to the power window control unit. As soon as the power window control unit detects a
change in the pulse frequency from the Hall 1C unit (pulser), the power window control unit makes the power window
motor stop and reverse. This prevents pinching your hand or fingers during auto-up operation. The anti-pinch function
does not work when the power window master switch is held in the closed position.
HALL 1C UN I T
POWER WINDOW MOTOR (PULSER)
Position when something

is pinched
Period of _ | |_ | L i. 1 1
pulses ----- —►(
Threshold value for
judgment of pinching
Resetting the Power Window Control Unit
Resetting the power window control unit after doing any

of the following:
• Power window master switch replacement
• Power window regulator replacement or repair
• Power window motor replacement or repair
• Window run channel replacement or repair
• Driver's door glass replacement or repair
2. Press and hold the driver's window DOWN switch.
4. Release the driver's window DOWN switch.
5. Repeat steps 1—4 three more times.
6. Check if the AUTO UP and AUTO DOWN functions still
work.
• If they still work, AUTO UP and AUTO DOWN
functions have not been cleared; go back to step 1.
• If they do not, go to step 7.
8. Move the driver's window all the way down by using
the driver's window DOWN switch.
9. Pull up and hold the driver's window UP switch until
the window reaches the fully closed position, then
continue to hold the switch for 1 second.
10. Make sure that the power window control unit is reset
by using the driver's window AUTO UP and AUTO
DOWN functions.
Circuit Diagram

BATTERY TERMINAL
FUSE BOX
BATTERY
No. 1 (100 A)
■crxjo
No. 60 (IGN) (50 A) No. 1 (10 A)
-crxjo-
IGNITION SWITCH POWER
No. 22 (7.5 A) WINDOW
— W H T - ^ ^ o X - YE RELAY
(P/W)
V JS y
IG1 HOT in ON (II)
and START (III) ) No. 3 No. 17
(20 A) (20 A)
P/W
RLY
F5 N4
GRY BRN
G501
G501
Power Window Master Switch Input Test
NOTE: The power window control unit is built into the power window master switch.
1. Remove the grip cover (see page 20-6).
2. Disconnect the 22P connector (A) from the power window master switch.
1 2 3
5 6 7 / 4 9 10 I f , Wire side of
female terminals
'/
12 13 14 15 16.17 '19 20 21 22
BLK / I
LT GRN RED PUR WHT RED GRN PUR
4. With the connector still disconnected, do these input tests at the following connector.
NOTE: Before testing, make sure the No. 1 (10 A), No. 22 (7.5 A), and No. 60 (50 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay are OK.
Cavity Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if desired result is not
obtained
3 BRN Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage between • Blown No. 17 (20A) fuse in the
terminals No. 3 and No. 11: under-dash fuse/relay box
There should be battery • Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box
voltage. • Faulty power window relay (P/W)
• Faulty MICU
• Poor ground (G501) or an open in the
wire
• An open or high resistance in the
wire
2 YEL Ignition switch ON (II) Connect terminals No. 3 and • Blown No. 17 (20 A) fuse in the
No. 2, and terminals No. 1 and under-dash fuse/relay box
No. 11 momentarily with • Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box
jumper wires: • Faulty front passenger's power
The front passenger's window window motor
should open. • Faulty front passenger's power
1 WHT Ignition switch ON (II) Connect terminals No. 3 and window switch
No. 1, and terminals No. 2 and • Poor ground (G501) or an open in the
No. 11 momentarily with ground wire
jumper wires: • An open or high resistance in the
The front passenger's window wire
should close.
13 LT GRN Ignition switch ON (II) Connect terminals No. 15 and • Blown No. 18 (20 A) fuse in the
No. 13, and terminals No. 14 under-dash fuse/relay box
and No. 11 momentarily with • Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box
jumper wires: • Faulty right rear power window
The right rear window should motor
close. • Faulty right rear power window
14 RED Ignition switch ON (II) Connect terminals No. 15 and switch
No. 14, and terminals No. 13 • Poor ground (G501) or an open in the
and No. 11 momentarily with ground wire
jumper wires: • An open or high resistance in the
The right rear window should wire
open.
21 GRN Ignition switch ON (II) Connect terminals No. 20 and • Blown No. 19 (20 A) fuse in the
No. 21, and terminals No. 22 under-dash fuse/relay box
and No. 11 momentarily with • Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box
jumper wires: • Faulty left rear power window motor
The left rear window should • Faulty left rear power window switch
open. • Poor ground (G501) or an open in the
22 PUR Ignition switch ON (II) Connect terminals No. 20 and ground wire
No. 22, and terminals No. 21 • An open or high resistance in the
and No. 11 momentarily with wire
jumper wires:
The left rear window should
close.
10 ORN Connect terminals No. 4 and Check driver's power window • Blown No. 3 (20 A) fuse in the
No. 10, and terminals No. 9 motor operation: under-dash fuse/relay box
and No. 12 momentarily with The driver's window should • Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box
jumper wires close. • Faulty driver's power window motor
9 BLU Connect terminals No. 4 and Check driver's power window • Poor ground (G501) or an open in the
No. 9, and terminals No. 10 motor operation: ground wire
and No. 12 momentarily with The driver's window should • An open or high resistance in the
jumper wires open. wire
(cont'd)
Power Window Master Switch Input Test (cont'd)
5. Reconnect the connector to the power window master switch. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and do these input tests at the
following connector.
• If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be fau l ty; replace the power window master switch (see page 22-242).
NOTE: After replacing the power window master switch, reset the power window control unit (see page 22-231).
Cavity W ire Test condition Test; Desired result Possible cause if desired result is not
obtained
7 LT GRN Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the vo l tage to • Poor ground (G501) or an open in the
ground: There should be less ground wire
than 0.2 V. • Faulty power window master switch
wire
16 WHT Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to • Faulty power w i ndow master switch
ground: • A short to ground in the wire
There should be battery
voltage.
5 GRN Igniti on switch ON (II), and Measure the voltage between • Faulty power window master switch
driver's window switch terminals No. 5 and No. 7: • Faulty driver's power window motor
moving up or down An analog voltmeter should • An open or high resistance in the
read about 0 V —about 5 V — wire
0 V — about 5 V repeatedly (a • A short to ground in the wire
digital voltmeter should read
about 2.5 V while the window
moves).
6 PNK Ignition switch ON (II), and Measure the voltage between
driver's power window switch terminals No. 6 and No. 7:
moving up or down An analog voltmeter should
read about 0 V —about 5 V —
0 V — about 5 V repeated l y (a
digital voltmeter should read
about 2.5 V while the window
moves).
4 GRY Under all conditions Measure the voltage to • Bl own No. 3 (20 A) fuse in the
There shou l d be battery • Faul ty under-dash fuse/relay box
voltage. • An open or high resistance in the
wire
3 BRN Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to • Bl own No. 17 (20 A) fuse in the
ground: under- dash fuse/relay box
• Faulty M I CU
wire
15 PUR Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to • Bl own No. 18 (20 A) fuse in the
• Faulty MICU
wire
20 RED Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to • Blown No. 19 (20 A) fuse in the
• Faulty MICU
wire
11 BLK Under a l l conditions Measure the voltage to • Poor ground (G501) or an open in the
ground: ground wire
There should be less than • An open or high resistance in the
0.2 V. wire
12 BLK Under all conditions Measure the vo l tage to • Poor ground (G501) or an open in the
ground: ground wire
There should be less than • An open or high resistance in the
0.2 V. wire
Driver's Power Window Motor Test
Motor Test 6. Check for continuity between power window master

switch 22P connector termina l s No. 9 and No. 10 and
1. Remove the power window master switch (see page driver's power window motor 6P connector terminals
22-242). No. 1 and No. 4 respectively. There should be
2. Test the motor in each direction by connecting battery continuity.
power and ground to the power window master
switch 22P connector (A) according to the table. POWER WINDOW DRIVER S POWER
MASTER SWITCH WINDOW MOTOR 6P
Terminal 22P CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
fv 10 9 1
Direction
10 4
UP © ©
DOW N © © DRIVER’S POWER W INDO W MOTOR 6P CONNECTOR
W ire side of fem ale terminals
DOW N+ UP+
(BLU) (ORN)
DOW N +
(BLU) UP+
(ORN)
1 2 3 4 5 | 6 | 7 M 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 |16|17|/119 20 21 22
POWER W INDO W MASTER SWITCH 22P CONNECTOR

7. If the wire harness is OK, the driver's power window

1 2 3 4 pi©17 1 /| 9 10 11 motor is faulty; replace the driver's door regulator
12 13 14 15 20 21 22 (see page 20-15).
Pulser Test
8. Check for continuity between the driver's power
3. If the motor does not run or fail s to run smoothly, go window motor 6P connector terminal No. 2 and body
to step 4. If the motor is OK, do the power window ground. There should be continuity.
master switch input test (see page 22-234).
• If there is continuity, go to step 9.
4. Remove the front door panel (see page 20-6). • If there is no continuity, check for an open or high
resistance in the BLK wire or poor ground (G501).
5. Disconnect the 6P connector (A) from the dr i ver's
power window motor (B).
DRIVER S POWER W INDO W MOTOR 6P CONNECTOR
SGND (LT GRN)

f . ."n
2 3
1
V
5 6
J
D
9. Do the power window master switch test for terminals

No. 5, No. 6, and No. 16 (see page 22-240).
Front Passenger's Power Window Motor Test
1. Remove the front passenger's power window switch 5. Check for continuity between front passenger's
(see page 22-242). power window switch 5P connector terminals No. 2
and No. 5 and front passenger's power window motor
2. Test the motor in each direction by connecting battery 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 respectively.
power and ground to the front passenger's power There should be continuity.
window switch 5P connector (A) according to the
table. FRONT FRONT PASSENGER S
PASSENGER'S POWER WINDOW
\ Terminal POWER WINDOW MOTOR 2P
2 5
Direction \ SWITCH 5P CONNECTOR
UP © 0 CONNECTOR
DOWN 0 ©
2 2
5 1
FRONT PASSENGER'S POWER W INDOW MOTOR
2P CONNECTOR
Wire side o ffe m a l e terminals
FRONT PASSENGER'S POWER W INDOW SWITCH

1 2 3 4 5 5P CONNECTOR
6. If the wire harness is OK, the front passenger's power

W ire side of female terminals window motor is faulty; replace the front passenger's
door regulator (see page 20-15).
3. Remove the front door panel (see page 20-6).
4. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the front
passenger's power window motor (B).
Rear Power Window Motor Test
1. Remove the rear power window switch (see page 6. Check for continuity between rear power window
22-242). switch 5P connector terminals No. 2 and No. 5 and
rear power window motor 2P connector terminals
2. Test the motor in each direction by connecting battery No. 1 and No. 2 respectively. There should be
power and ground to the rear power window switch continuity.
5P connector (A) according to the table.
REAR POWER REAR POWER
\ Terminal WINDOW SWITCH WINDOW MOTOR 2P
2 5
Direction \ 5P CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
UP © © No. 2 terminal No. 2 terminal
DOWN © ©
No. 5 terminal No. 1 terminal
REAR POWER W INDO W MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR
DOW N+ UP+
(O RN)*1 (G RY)*1
(BLU)*2 (PNK)*2
DOW N+
(O R N )*1
1 2 3 4 5
REAR POWER W INDO W SWITCH 5P CONNECTOR

1 2 3 4 5 W ire side of female terminals
*1: Left rear

*2: Right rear
Wire side of female terminals 7. If the wire harness is OK, the rear power window
motor is faulty; replace the rear door regulator (see
3. If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly, go
page 20-26).
to step 4. I f the motor is OK, do the power window
master switch input test (see page 22-234).
4. Remove the rear door panel (see page 20-18).
5. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the rear power
window motor (B).
Power Window Master Switch Test
1. Remove the grip cover (see page 20-6).

2. Disconnect the 22P connector (A) from the power
window master switch.
s~~
2 3 4 5 16 17 | / i 9 10
12 13 14 15 20 21 22
3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each

switch position according to the tables.
Front Passenger's Switch
Driver's Switch
The driver's switch is combined with the control unit
so you cannot isolate the switch to test it.
Instead, run the power window master switch input

test procedures (see page 22-234). If the tests are
normal, the driver's switch must be faulty; replace the
power window master switch (see page 22-242).
4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch
(see page 22-242).
Passenger's Power Window Switch Test
1. Remove the grip cover: 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each
• Front passenger's (see page 20-6) switch position according to the table.
• Rear (see page 20-18)
Terminal
2. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) from the passenger's 1 3 4 2 5
window switch. Position
Front passenger's
OFF o- o - -o -o
UP o - o- - o - o
DOWN
o -
o- -o
-o
4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch
(see page 22-242).
Power Window Master Switch Passenger's Power Window Switch
Replacement Replacement
1. Remove the front door panel (A) (see page 20-6). NOTE: The illustration shows front passenger's power
window switch.
1. Remove the door panel:
• Front passenger's (see page 20-6)
• Rear (see page 20-18)
2. Remove the screws and the grip base (A).
2. Open the switch panel (A) from the grip base.
3. Remove the screws and replace the power window

master switch (B).
4. Remove the screws and replace the passenger's

power window switch (B).
22242
(cont'd)
Test, page 22-260

System Description
Reverse (Gear Position) Linked Rear Wiper

When the shift lever is shifted to R with the windshield wiper activated, the rear window wiper operates automatically
even if the rear window wiper switch is off.
Interm ittent operation (Basic)
ON
Back-up light
OFF _ r
INT
Windshield w iper switch
OFF
ON
Rear w ind ow w iper switch
OFF
- 0.7±0.1 sec.
Rear w ind ow w iper ON
auto stop position
OFF i —i L nsec.
.0+1.5 7.0 ±1.5
sec.
ON
Rear w indow w iper m otor
OFF SUL jl ____ n
• Initial Intermittent activation
activation
Continuous operation (Basic)
ON
Back-up light
OFF _r
HI or LO
Windshield w iper switch INT
OFF
ON
Rear w indow w iper switch
OFF j
- 0.7±0.1 sec.
Rear w ind ow w iper ON
auto stop position
OFF U U U U n ^ U U L T
Rear w indow w iper m otor _JUUUl JLJUl
Continuous Intermittent Consecutive
activation activatio n activation
Circuit Diagram - Windshield
BATTERY TERMINAL FUSE BOX UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
(Canada models)
r--------------- "i
GAUGE
CONTROL
MODULE
WASHER
1 FLUID
LEVEL
J
fuli
SWITCH
(Closed:
Float down)
2 (O pen:
Float up)
&1.I\
1
G502 G501 G501 G201
Circuit Diagram - Rear Window
BATTERY TERMINAL
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC B1028: Rear wiper motor (Park) signal 9. Check for continuity between rear window wiper
motor 4P connector terminal No. 4 and body ground.
error
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTC's, be sure REAR W INDO W WIPER MOTOR 4P CONNECTOR
j
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. 1 A GND (BLK)
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to 3 4
ON (II).
3. Operate the rear window wiper for at least 15
seconds, then turn the rear window wiper switch OFF.
W i re side offem ale terminals
Is DTC B 1 0 2 8 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5. Is there continuity?
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. YES-Go to step 10.

Check for loose or poor connections.^
NO-Repair open in the wire between rear window
5. Check the No. 16 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash wiper motor 4P connector terminal No. 4 and body
fuse/relay box. ground (G602).H
Is the fuse OK? 10. Do the rear window wiper motor test (see page
22-260).
YES-Go to step 6.
Is the rear window wiper motor OK?
NO-Replace the fuse, and recheck the system.■
YES-Go to step 11.
6. Disconnect the rear window wiper motor 4P
connector. NO-Replace the rear window wiper motor.H
7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 11. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connector
C.
8. Measure the voltage between rear window wiper
motor 4P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
REAR W INDO W WIPER MOTOR 4P CONNECTOR
1*1
I1 A
3 4
Wire side offem ale terminals
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the under-dash
fuse/relay box and the rear window wiper motor.®
12. Measure the voltage between rear window wiper 14. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay
motor 4P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground. box connector C (49P) terminal No. 29 and rear
window wiper rear window wiper motor 4P connector
terminal No. 3.
1 y\ r1
COM (BRN) 1
3 COM (BRN)
A
3 4
Ft 2i|22L/T^
e gPl ' 1/1/ 1 ssl
BBIEiES5311

YES-Repair short to power in the wire between the
rear window wiper motor and the under-dash Is there continuity?
fuse/relay b o x .l
NO-Go to step 13. box.B
13. Check for continuity between rear window wiper • USA models (see page 22-65)
motor 4P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground. • Canada models (see page 22-66)
NO-Repair open in the wire between the rear window
REAR W INDO W WIPER MOTOR 4P CONNECTOR wiper motor and the under-dash fuse/relay box.B
YES-Repair short to ground in the wire between the

rear window wiper motor and the under-dash
fuse/relay b o x .l
NO-Go to step 14.
(cont'd)
DTC B1077: Wiper Auto-Stop (As) Signal 9. Check for continuity between windshield wiper motor
5P connector terminal No. 1 and under-dash
Circuit Malfunction
fuse/relay box connector B (36P) terminal No. 20.
WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR 5P CONNECTOR
to follow the instruction in B-CAN System Diagnosis Wire side of fem a l e terminals
AS (PNK) m
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. 1 3
ON (II).
V 5/
AS (PNK)
3. Turn the wiper switch to LOW or HIGH for at least
15 seconds, then turn the switch OFF.
0 0 7 H 6 0 I] is
Do the wiper arms stop at AUTO STOP (park) position?
----- g [ a ) 2 5 |2 6 |/ [ f f l] f f l] [3 0 ]3 l |3 2 |3 3 | 3 t |3 5 | l/
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Go to step 5. UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR B (36P)
Wire side of fem a l e terminals
YES-Go to step 10.
YES-Check for loose or poor connections at the MICU
and the wiper motor. If the connections are OK, NO-Repair an open or high resistance in the wire.H
replace the under-dash fuse/relay box.H 10. Check for continuity between windshield wiper motor
• USA models (see page 22-65) 5P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR 5P CONNECTOR
Check for loose or poor connections.!
6. Do the windshield wiper motor test (see page 22-260).
AS (PNK)
1/r—i. 3
Is the windshield wiper motor OK?
V I5/
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the windshield wiper motor (see page
22-262), and recheck.H
7. Disconnect the windshield wiper motor 5P connector.
8. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector B Is there continuity?
(36P).
YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.I
NO-Go to step 11.
12. Measure the voltage between windshield wiper 17. Measure the voltage between body ground and
motor 5P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground. windshield wiper motor 5P connector terminal No. 3
with the wiper switch ON (Low), and measure the
voltage between body ground and windshield wiper
WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR 5P CONNECTOR
motor 5P connector terminal No. 5 with the wiper
switch ON (High) individually.
,—,
1 l/ / l 33 WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR 5P CONNECTOR
V ii/
Is th e r e v o lta g e ?
YES-Repair short to power in the wire.B W ire side offem ale terminals
NO-Faulty MI CU; replace the under-dash fuse/relay

box.B Is th e re v o lta g e ?
• USA models (see page 22-65) YES-Repair an open or high resistance in the wire
• Canada models (see page 22-66) between the windshield wiper motor and body
13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). ground. If the wire is OK, check for poor ground
(G30D.B
14. Check the No. 56 (30 A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box. NO-Go to step 18.
Is th e fu s e O K ?
YES-Go to step 15.
NO-Replace the fuse, and recheck the system.B
15. Do the windshield wiper motor test (see page 22-260).
Is th e w in d s h ie ld w ip e r m o t o r O K ?
YES-Go to step 16.
NO-Replace the windshie l d wiper motor (see page
22-262), and recheck.B
16. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connector
A (36P) and the windshield wiper motor 5P connector.
18. Measure the voltage between body ground and DTC B1281; Front wiper MIST position Circuit
under-dash fuse/relay box connector A (36P) terminal Malfunction
No. 14 with the wiper switch ON (Low), and measure
the voltage between body ground and under-dash DTC B1282; Front wiper INT(AUTO) position
fuse/relay box connector A (36P) terminal No. 7 with
the wiper switch ON (High) individually. Circuit Malfunction
DTC B1283: Front wiper LOW position Circuit
Malfunction
HI (GRN) LO (BLU) DTC B1284: Front wiper HIGH position Circuit
Malfunction
ON (II).
3. Operate each wiper switch position, then turn the
Wire side of female terminals wiper/washer switch OFF.
Is th e re b a tte r y v o lta g e ? Is D T C B 1 2 8 1 , B 1 2 8 2 , B 1 2 8 3 , o r B 1 2 8 4 in d ic a t e d ?
YES-Repair an open or high resistance in the BLU YES-Go to step 5.
(LO) or GRN (HI) wire.B
NO-Check for loose or poor connections at the MICU Check for loose or poor connections.B
and the windshield wiper motor. If the connections
are OK, replace the under-dash fuse/relay box.B 5. Select WIPER from the BODY ELECTRICAL menu, and
enter DATA LIST.
• Canada models (see page 22-66) 6. Check each wiper switch position value with the
DATA LIST menu.
When the wiper switch is OFF:
Data List Value
Wiper Switch (LOW) OFF
Wiper Switch (HIGH) OFF
Wiper Switch (MIST) OFF
Wiper Switch (INT) OFF
A r e a ll d a ta lis t v a lu e s c o r r e c t ?
YES-Go to step 15.
NO-Go to step 7.
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 15. Check each wiper switch position value with the
DATA LIST menu.
8. Disconnect the wiper/washer switch 8P connector.
9. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). When the wiper switch is ON (LOW):
Data List Value
10. Select WIPER from the BODY ELECTRICAL menu. Wiper Switch (LOW) ON
11. Check each wiper switch position value with the
When the wiper switch is ON (HIGH):
DATA LIST menu.
Data List Value
Data List Value Wiper Switch (HIGH) ON
Wiper Switch (LOW) OFF
Wiper Switch (HIGH) OFF When the wiper switch is MIST:
Wiper Switch (MIST) OFF Data List Value
Wiper Switch (INT) OFF Wiper Switch (MIST) ON
A r e a ll d a ta lis t v a lu e s c o r r e c t?
When the wiper switch is INT:
YES-Replace the wiper/washer switch (see page Data List Value
22-259).B Wiper Switch (INT) ON
NO-Go to step 12. A r e a ll d a ta lis t v a lu e s c o r r e c t?
12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). YES-Faulty MICU, replace the under-dash fuse/relay
13. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector M box.B
(34P). • USA models (see page 22-65)
box connector M (24P) terminals No. 10, No. 11, and NO-Go to step 16.
No. 12 and body ground.
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR M (34P) 17. Do the wiper/washer switch test (see page 22-259).
FR WiP INT/LO SW (ORN) Is th e w ip e r / w a s h e r s w itc h O K ?
FR WIP HI/LO SW (RED) FR WIP M IST YES-Go to step 18.

NO-Replace the wiper/washer switch (see page
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 / 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 / 20 21 / 23 24 / /
22-259).B
/ / / / / / 33 34
18. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connectors M
(34P) and Q (16P).
YES-Repair short to ground in the wires.B
box.B
(cont'd)
19. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

box connector M (34P) terminals and the
YES-Faulty MICU, replace the under-dash fuse/relay
wiper/washer switch 8P connector terminals as
shown: box.B
Under-dash Wiper/wash switch 8P • Canada models (see page 22-66)
fuse/relay box connector
connector M (34P) NO-Repair open in the wires.B
10 4
11 2
12 3
Under-dash Wiper/wash switch 8P

fuse/relay box connector
connector Q(16P)
5 5
FP WIPER MIST SW (GRN)

FP WIPER
FP WIPER HI/LO SW (RED) INT/LO SW (ORN)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 / 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 / 20 21 / 23 24 / / / / / / / / 33 34
^ FP WIPER HI/LO SW (RED)
FP WIPER M IST FP WIPER

SW (GRN)
1 2 3 4 INT/LO SW (ORN)
5 6 7/
WIPER/WASHER SWITCH 8P CONNECTOR

W ire side of female termina l s
n__ ri
1 2 3 4 5 6
9 10 11 / 13 14 /
z
GND (BLK)
__ n
8
16
1 2 3 4
5 6 7/
GND (BLK)
WIPER/WASHER SWITCH 8P CONNECTOR

Wire side offem ale termina l s
MICU Input Test
NOTE:
• Before performing the input tests, check the No. 16 (10 A), No. 21 (15 A), and No. 56 (30 A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box.
• If there is malfunction of the rear window wiper operation, and no DTCs are detected, check the rear window wiper
motor and an open in the ground circuit of the rear window wiper (see step 9 on page 22-248).
3. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connectors A, B, C, K, M, N, Q, and W.
GRN BLU
— RM7Tiifi3R|
I l ^ 28!29! [glf l ^ l ^ l i s ll x
PNK
CONNECTOR C (49P)
P 10Z H Z 0 ZI \Ztm0 7 M BazEffiZIpl ft

V S - X \kW\ k \/-A.I..,......, |2 4K|/l2
,......,..I f
6|
- lf I , ,
\ / \ / \ 2.lfB \j
,......., K - K
L
-,..... , ~ 7
[£|^|^L/|85ja| |43]yn45| 46|fl^L/
PUR BRN
CONNECTOR K (10P) CONNECTOR M (34P)

RED ORN GRN PUR YEL BLU
BLK
=_n
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 / 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
5 6 10 18 / 20 21 / 23 24 / / / 33 34
BLK
CONNECTOR N (8P) CONNECTOR O (16P) CONNECTOR W (1P )

BLK BLK
n__ _rl- —r
1 i— i 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 z 8
fT f
to
4 7 8 9 10 11 / 13 14 / 16
CO
i—
BLK YEL
4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are a l l making good contact.
(cont'd)
W1 YEL Ignition switch ON Measure the voltage to ground: ® Blown No. 60 (IGN) (50 A)
(ID There should be battery voltage. fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box
• An open or high
resistance in the wire
A7 GRN Under all Connect the terminal A7 to battery • Poor ground (G301) or an
conditions power: open in the ground wire
The wiper motor should run at high • Faulty wiper motor
speed. • An open or high
A14 BLU Under all Connect the terminal A14 to battery resistance in the wire
conditions power:
The wiper motor should run at low
speed.
A34 ORN Under all Connect the terminal A34 to battery • Faulty washer motor
conditions power and terminal A35 to body • An open or high
ground: resistance in the wire
The washer motor should run.
A35 LT Under all Connect the terminal A35 to battery • Faulty washer motor
BLU conditions power and terminal A34 to body • An open or high
ground: resistance in the wire
The washer motor should run.
B20 PNK The motor stops at Check for continuity to ground: • Faulty wiper motor
auto-stop position. There should be continuity. • Poor ground (G301) or an
• An open or high
Connect the Check for continuity to ground: Faulty wiper motor
terminal A14to the There should be no continuity.
battery power
momentarily, and
stop the motor
operation before
the motor reaches
the auto-stop
position.
C39 PUR Connect battery Check rear window wiper motor • Faulty rear window wiper
power to terminal operation: motor
C29 BRN C39, then connect The rear window wiper motor should • An open or high
terminal C29 to run, and the park position. resistance in the wire
body ground • Poor ground (G602) or an
momentarily. open in the ground wire
6. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box, turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and do these input tests
at the following connectors.
K10 BLK I n all ignition Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G502)
switch positions There should be less than 0.2 V. • An open or high
M16 BLK In all ignition Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G501)
N2 BLK In all ignition Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G501)
Q9 BLK In all ignition Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G502)
M10 RED Wiper/washer Measure the voltage between • Faulty wiper/washer
switch (LO or HI) terminals M10 and 05: switch
Q5 BLK ON There should be less than 0.2 V. • An open or high
Wiper/washer Measure the voltage between Faulty wiper/washer switch
switch OFF terminals M10 and Q5:
There should be about 5 V or more.
M11 ORN Wiper/washer Measure the voltage between • Faulty wiper/washer
switch (INT or LO) terminals M11 and 05: switch
Q5 BLK ON There should be less than 0.2 V. • An open or high
switch OFF terminals M11 and 05:
M12 GRN Wiper/washer Measure the voltage between • Faulty wiper/washer
switch (MIST) ON terminals M12 and 05: switch
Q5 BLK There should be less than 0.2 V. • An open or high
switch OFF terminals M12 and 05:
M13 PUR Washer switch ON Measure the voltage between • Faulty wiper/washer
terminals M13 and 05: switch
Q5 BLK There should be less than 0.2 V. • An open or high
Washer switch OFF Measure the voltage between Faulty wiper/washer switch
terminals M13 and 05:
M14 YEL Rear window Measure the voltage between • Faulty Rear window
wiper/washer terminals M14 and Q5: wiper/washer switch
Q5 BLK switch (RR WIPER) There should be less than 0.2 V. • An open or high
ON resistance in the wire
Rear window Measure the voltage between Faulty Rear window
wiper/washer terminals M14 and 05: wiper/washer switch
switch OFF There should be about 5 V or more.
(cont'd)
M15 BLU Rear window Measure the voltage between • Faulty Rear window
Q5 BLK switch (RR WASH) There should be less than 0.2 V. • An open or high
ON resistance in the wire
Rear window Measure the voltage between Faulty Rear window
switch OFF There should be about 5 V or more.
Wiper/Washer Switch Test/Replacement
1. Remove the steering column covers (see page 6. Check for continuity between the terminals in each
20-105). switch position according to the table.
2. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness 8P connector Wiper
(A) from the wiper/washer switch (B).
Terminal
1 2 3 4 5
Position ^
OFF
INT o -o
LO o -o - o
HI o - - o
Mist ON o - - o
Washer ON o -o
Rear window wiper
\ Terminal
7 6 5
3. Turn the steering wheel to access the wiper/washer Position \
switch screws (C). Washer Switch ON,
wiper switch OFF o - - o
4. Remove the two screws, then slide out the
wiper/washer switch. OFF
5. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all Wiper switch ON,
washer switch OFF o - - o
making good contact.
• If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair Wiper and washer —o
switch ON o - - o
them as necessary, and recheck the system.
• If the terminals look OK, go to step 6. 7. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch.
8. Install the switch in the reverse order of removal.
Wiper Motor Test
Windshield Rear Window

1. Remove the wiper arms (see page 22-264) and the NOTE: If there is malfunction of the rear window wiper
cowl lid (A). operation, and no DTCs are detected, test the rear
window wiper motor as described below, and check for
an open or high resistance in the ground circuit of the
rear window wiper (see step 9 on page 22-248).
1. Open the tailgate, and remove the tailgate lower trim
panel (see page 20-78).
2. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the wiper motor
(B).
2. Disconnect the 5P connector (B) from the wiper motor

(C).
3 yest motor by connecting battery power to
terminal No. 3 and ground to terminal No. 4 of the
wiper motor 5P connector. The motor should run at
low speed.
4. Test the motor by connecting battery power to 3. Test the motor by connecting battery power to
terminal No. 5 and ground to terminal No. 4 of the terminal No. 1 and ground to terminal No. 3 of the
wiper motor 5P connector. The motor should run at wiper motor. The motor should run.
high speed.
4. Connect an analog ohmmeter between rear window
5. Connect an analog ohmmeter to terminals No. 1 and wiper motor 4P connector terminals No. 3 and No. 4
No. 4, and run the motor at low speed (repeat step 3). and run the motor (repeat step 3). The needle of the
The needle of the ohmmeter should pulse. ohmmeter should pulse.
6. If the motor does not run, or fails to run smoothly, or 5. If the motor does not run, or fails to run smoothly, or
there is no pulse, replace the motor. there is no pulse, replace the motor.
Washer M o tor Test Washer Fluid Level Switch Test
1. Remove the right inner fender (see page 20-178). Canada models
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the washer 1. Remove the right inner fender (see page 20-178).
motor (B).
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the washer fluid
level switch (B).
3. Test the motor by connecting battery power to

terminal No. 1 (or No. 2), and ground to terminal No. 2
(or No. 1) of the washer motor. The motor should run. 3. Remove the washer fluid level switchfrom the washer
• If the motor does not run, or fails to run smoothly, reservoir.
replace the motor (see page 22-264). NOTE: Fluid may flow out of the opening.
• If the motor runs smoothly, but little or no washer
fluid is pumped, check for a disconnected or 4. Check for continuity between terminals No. 1 and
blocked washer hose, or a clogged washer motor No. 2 in each float position.
outlet. • There should be continuity when the float is down.
• There should be no continuity when the float is up.
5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch.
Wiper Motor Replacement
Removal 5. Mark lines (A) to show the original adjustment, then

remove the connection rod (B) from the linkage (C).
NOTE: Be careful not to scratch or damage the hood and
the body.
1. Remove the wiper arms (see page 22-264).
2. Remove the cowl cover (see page 20-168).
3. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) from the wiper motor
(B).
9.4 N-m
(0.95 k g fm , 6.9 Ibf-ft)
6. Remove the three bolts and the separate the wiper

motor (D) from the linkage assembly (E) through the
hole.
4. Remove the four bolts and the wiper linkage

assembly (C).
Installation Rear Window
1. Before installing the motor, connect the 5P connector NOTE: Be careful not to scratch or damage the tailgate.
to the wiper motor, and turn the wiper/washer switch
ON to LO or HI position, then OFF to return the motor 1. Remove the rear window wiper arm (see page
shaft to the park position. 22-264).
NOTE: 2. Open the tailgate, and remove the tailgate lower trim
panel (see page 20-78).
• Do not use the wiper/washer switch INT position in
this step. 3. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the rear window
• Apply multipurpose grease to the moving parts. wiper motor (B).
2. Install the wiper motor to the wiper linkage assembly
in the reverse order of removal.
3. Install the linkage to the wiper motor shaft, then align
the mark (A) of the linkage and the mark (B) of the
wiper linkage assembly.
NOTE: The linkage should be installed at the angle
specified below.
19 N-m
(1.9 kgf m, 13 Ibf-ft)
4. Remove the three bolts and the rear window wiper
motor.
5. Install in the reverse order of removal, and note these
4. After installation, adjust the wiper arms (see page items:
22-267).
• Grease the moving parts.
• Before reinstalling the wiper arm, turn the rear
window wiper switch ON, then OFF to return the
wiper shaft to the park position.
• Check the wiper motor operation.
Wiper Arm Replacement Washer Reservoir Replacement
NOTE: Set the wiper arms to the auto-stop position 1. Remove the front bumper (see page 20-144).
before removal and installation.
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) and tubes (B) from
Windshield the washer motor (C) and the washer fluid level
switch (Canada models).
NOTE: Always pull up the driver's side wiper blade first.
Washer Reservoir Capacity:
1. Remove the caps, the nuts, and the wiper arms. 2.5 L (2.6 US qt): USA models
4.5 L (4.8 US qt): Canada models
Rear Window
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the tailgate. 3. Remove the washer motor from the washer reservoir
1. Remove the cover, the nut, and the wiper arm. (D).
4. Remove the bolts (A) and clips (B), then remove the
washer reservoir (C).
B
5. Install the washer reservoir in the reverse order of

removal. Check the washer motor operation.
Wiper Blade Replacement
Windshield 4. Align the groove (A) in each rail (B) with the tabs in a
new wiper blade, then install the new wiper blade and
1, Lift the wiper arms from the windshield. rails into the blade holder in the reverse order of
removal.
NOTE: Lift the driver's side first.
2. Pull up and hold the tab (A) of the wiper blade
assembly (B), and remove the wiper blade assembly
from the wiper arm (C).
5. Install the wiper blade assemblies onto the wiper

arms in the reverse order of removal.
6. Test the wiper operation. If the blades slip, turn the
wiper switch OFF, and reinstall the blades securely.
Wiper Blade Replacement (cont'd)
Rear Window
I.Turn the wiper blade assemblies (A), and remove the
lock from the wiper arm (B).
2. Pull the wiper blade (A) up, and slide it out from the
wiper blade holder (B).
3. Install a new wiper blade in the reverse order of

removal.
4. Test the wiper operation. If the blade slips, turn the
wiper switch OFF, and reinstall the blade securely.
Wiper Arm/Nozzle Adjustment
INOTICE I
• When you adjust the washer nozzles, carefully move the outside of the washer nozzles (A).
• Do not insert tools into the nozzle hole (B), as it may cause the washer fluid to spray incorrectly.
(cont'd)
Wiper Arm/Nozzle Adjustment (cont'd)
Windshield Wiper Arms Park Position

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then turn the wiper switch ON, and then back OFF.
2. When the wiper arms stop at the park position, make sure that they are at the correct position.
Windshield
a: Position at about 92 mm (3.62 in) from the top of cowl cover (A),
b: Position at about 36 mm (1.42 in) from the top of cowl cover (A).
Rear window
c: Position at about 10 mm (0.39 in) from the black ceramic area (D).
Washer nozzle position
3. When you turn on the washers, make sure 50 % or more of the washer fluid lands within the spray area. If the spray
area is not within the standard positions, adjust the nozzles.
Windshield
d: Position at about 601 mm (23.66 in) from the top of the black ceramic area (B) at the lower windshield,
e: Position at about 485 mm (19.09 in) from the top of the black ceramic area (B) at the lower windshield,
f: Position at about 601 mm (23.66 in) from the top of the black ceramic area (B) at the lower windshield,
g: Position at about 250 mm (9.84 in) from the windshield center line (C).
h: Position at about 250 mm (9.84 in) from the windshield center line (C).
Rear Window
j: Position at about 24.7 mm (0.972 in) from the top of the black ceramic area (E).
C
Washer Tube Replacement
1. Remove the right inner fender (see page 20-178).

2. Remove the washer nozzles and clips, then remove the tubes.
(cont'd)
Washer Tube Replacement (cont'd)
3. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal. Take care not to pinch the washer tubes. Check the washer operation.
Component Lo cation Index
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH

Test, page 19-11
(cont'd)
Component Location index (cont'd)
SPEEDOMETER
32P CONNECTOR
r■ - l
BODY ■
USA models
EPS
LIGHTS-ON CRUISE M A IN
INDICATOR |i!S!i?l£M INDICATOR
INDICATOR INDICATOR CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR
SECURITY INDICATOR SIDE AIRBAG CUTOFF INDICATOR
FOG LIGHT INDICATOR LOW TIRE PRESSURE INDICATOR

(W ith FOG LIGHT)
VSA OFF
TPM S INDICATOR
VSA INDICATOR
SRS INDICATOR
HIGH TEMPERATURE
INDICATOR IMMOBILIZER
INDICATOR
SEAT BELT REMINDER
INDICATOR
DOOR OPEN
INDICATOR
M ALFUNCTION LOW FUEL INDICATOR

INDICATOR LAMP
(MIL)
CHARGING SYSTEM
INDICATOR BRAKE SYSTEM
LOW OIL PRESSURE LOW TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
INDICATOR INDICATOR
Canada models
EPS LIGHTS-ON CRUISE M AIN

HIGH BEAM
INDICATOR INDICATOR iINDICATOR
im u iu a iu k
INDICATOR CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR
SECURITY INDICATOR x \ \ n m m n m & rc m
,SIDE AIRBAG CUTOFF INDICATOR
FOG LIGHT INDICATOR
(W ith FOG LIGHT) SRS INDICATOR
VSA OFF INDICATOR IMMOBILIZER

INDICATOR
VSA INDICATOR
HIGH TEMPERATURE, SEAT BELT REMINDER

INDICATOR INDICATOR
DOOR OPEN
INDICATOR
WASHER FLUID
LEVEL INDICATOR
MALFUNCTION LOW FUEL INDICATOR

INDICATOR LAMP
(MIL) BRAKE SYSTEM
ABS INDICATOR
INDICATOR
CHARGING SYSTEM LOW TEMPERATURE
INDICATOR INDICATOR
LOW OIL PRESSURE
INDICATOR
Self-Diagnostic Function
NOTE: Before doing the self-diagnostic function, make sure the No. 1 (10 A) and the No. 22 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box are OK.
The gauge control module has a self-diagnostic function which consists of the following checks:
• The beeper drive circuit check.
• The indicator drive circuit check.
• The switch input test.
• The LCD segment check.
• The gauges drive circuit check (tachometer, fuel gauge, speedometer).
© The communication line check of the B-CAN (body-controller area network) communication line and the F-CAN
(fast-controller area network) communication line between the gauges.
NOTE:
Indicators are also controlled via the communication lines.
Entering the Self-Diagnostic Function With the HDS
Using the HDS, select Body Electrical, Gauges, then Function Test and do the self-diagnostic function.
Entering the Self-Diagnostic Function (Manual method)
1. Push and hold the SELECT/RESET button.
2. Turn the combination light switch (-D0-) ON.
4. Within 5 sec., turn the combination light switch B00-) OFF, then ON and OFF again.
5. Within 5 sec., release the SELECT/RESET button, and then push and release the button three times repeatedly.
NOTE:
• While in the self-diagnostic mode, the dashlights brightness controller operates normally.
• While in the self-diagnostic mode, the SELECT/RESET button is used to start the Beeper Drive Circuit Test and the
Gauge Drive Circuit Check.
• If the vehicle speed exceeds 1.2 mph (2 km/h) or the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0), the self-diagnostic mode
ends.
ON (II)
Ignition
Switch
ON
Lighting
Switch
OFF
ON
SELECT/RESET
Button
OFF
Move to self-diagnostic mode.
5 sec. 5 sec.
The Indicator Drive Circuit Check
When entering the self-diagnostic mode, the following indicators (if equipped) blink:
ABS indicator, brake system indicator, A/T gear position indicator, charging system indicator, cruise control indicator,
cruise main indicator, EPS indicator, high beam indicator, high temperature indicator, immobilizer indicator, lights-on
indicator, low temperature indicator, low oil pressure indicator, low fuel indicator, malfunction indicator lamp (MIL),
seat belt indicator, security indicator, side airbag cutoff indicator, sequential sportshift mode shift indicator, SRS
indicator, fog light indicator, ABS malfunction indicator, VSA malfunction/activation indicator*, DRL indicator, TPMS
indicator, low tire pressure indicator, VSA OFF indicator*, washer fluid level indicator (Canada models), maintenance
required indicator.
With VSA
The Beeper Drive Circuit Check
When entering the self-diagnostic mode, the beeper sounds five times.
Switch Input Check
At the initial stage of the self-diagnostic function, the beeper sounds intermittently. The beeper sounds continuously
when any of the following switch inputs are switched from OFF to ON: Cruise control main, SET/DECEL, RES/ACCEL,
CANCEL switches, VSA OFF switch, SELECT/RESET button, parking brake switch.
The LCD Segment Check
When entering the self-diagnostic mode, all the segments blink five times.
The Gauge Drive Circuit Check
When entering the self-diagnostic mode, the speedometer, the tachometer, the fuel gauge needles sweep from the
minimum position to maximum position, then return to the minimum position.
NOTE:
After the beeper stops sounding and the gauge needles return to the minimum position, pressing the SELECT/RESET
button starts the Beeper Drive Circuit Check (one beep) and the Gauge Drive Circuit Check again.
The check cannot be started again until the gauge needles return to the minimum position.
Self-diagnostic ON __ f
mode OFF ;
SELECT/RESET ON
on I n n n _____ n
button npp
OFF ! ■1
Gauge needles
Ut-I-
OFF I
Lf* ;
Beeper on
OFF
The needles sweep from the
minimum position to the
maximum position, then return
to the minimum position.
If the needles fail to sweep, or the beeper does not sound, replace the gauge control module.
(cont'd)
Self-Diagnostic Function (cont'd)
The Communication Line Check

While in the self-diagnostic mode, the communication line check starts after the LCD Segments Check.
If all segments come on, the communication line is OK. If faulty, the letters "Err" will be indicated on the odometer
display followed by number(s).
Error Code List

Error code Type of communication line(s) error
Error 1 F-CAN communication
Error 2 B-CAN communication
Error 12 F-CAN and B-CAN communication
Example Indication
Normal (all segments come on.) Faulty (Error 1)
O O O O O O C ______ •
u u u K J u u •_ I I f
• Err 1: there is a malfunction in the communication line between the gauge control module and F-CAN. Check for DTCs
in the ECM/PCM (see page 11-3), and troubleshoot the indicated DTCs.
• Err 2: there is a malfunction in the communication line between the gauge control module and B-CAN. Check for DTCs
in the body electrical system and troubleshoot the indicated DTCs.
• Err 12: there is a malfunction in the communication line between the gauge control module and F-CAN or B-CAN.
Check for DTCs in the ECM/PCM first and troubleshoot the indicated DTCs. If there is no DTCs in the ECM/PCM, check
for the body electrical system DTCs and troubleshoot the indicated DTCs.
Ending the self-diagnostic function

Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
NOTE: If the vehicle speed exceeds 1.2 mph (2 km/h), the se l f-diagnostic function ends.
Circuit Diagram
BATTERY TERMINAL
FUSE BOX UNDER-DASH FUSE RELAY BOX
IGNITION SWITCH
No. 1 (100 A)
\ ..
(+ >
/
IG1 HOT in ON (II)

No. 22 (7.5 A) W1 and START (III)
08 N1
LT BLU PNK
• ECM/PCM • HAZARD WARNING

SWITCH LIGHT
• EPS CONTROL UNIT
• SRS UNIT • AUDIO UNIT
• ABS MODULATOR- • A/T GEAR POSITION
CONTROL UNIT INDICATOR
• DATA LINK CONNECTOR • PASSENGER'S AIRBAG
(DLC) CUTOFF INDICATOR
• TPMS CONTROL UNIT • REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
SWITCH LIGHT
• YAW RATE ACCELERATION
SENSOR • STEERING WHEEL
SWITCH LIGHT
• VSA MODULATOR-
CONTROL UNIT • A/C SWITCH LIGHT
■ HEATER CONTROL
PANEL LIGHT
■ POWER MIRROR
SWITCH LIGHT
■ VSA OFF SWITCH LIGHT
■ CONSOLE BOX LIGHT* 4
*1 : With security
* 2 ; With paddle shifter +/-
*3 : With cruise control
* 4 : '12 model
- ; CAN line
G501
(cont'd)

* 1 : With cruise control
*2 : W ith VSA
*3: With TPMS
•4: With fog lights
*5 : Canada models
(cont'd)
MICU
G401
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC B1152: Gauge control module internal DTC B1155: Gauge control module lost
(EEPROM) error communication with MICU (headlight switch
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTC's, be sure message)
DTC B1156: Gauge Control Module lost
communication with MICU (wiper switch
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. message)
ON (II). DTC B1157: Gauge control module lost
communication with the MICU (MICU
message)
Is D T C B 1 1 5 2 in d ic a t e d ?
DTC B1159: Gauge control module lost
YES-Replace the gauge control module (see page
22-294).B communication with the MICU (DOORSW
message)
NO-lntermittent failure, the gauge control modu l e is
OK at thistime.H NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure
ON (II).
Is DTC B1155, B1156, B1157, o rB 1 15 9 indicated?
YES-Faulty gauge control module; replace the gauge

control module (see page 22-294).
NO-lntermittent failure, the gauge control module is
OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections
between the gauge control module and the MICU.B
DTC B1168: Gauge control modul e l ost 10. Check for continuity between gauge control module
communication with the PCM (Engine 32P connector terminals No. 29 and No. 30 and
ECM/PCM connector terminals A (49P) terminals No.
messages) 4 and No. 3 respectiverly.
DTC B1169: Gauge control module lost GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 32P CONNECTOR
Wire side of fem a l e termina l s
communication with the PCM (A/T messages)
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multipl e DTCs, be sure 'i T / i n n m > 1 7 W /L /h 3 |/l/|i6 |
to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis |1 7 |1 8 |1 9 |2 0 |2 1 |2 2 |2 3 |2 4 |2 5 L /|2 7 |2 8 |2 9 |3 0 |/|3 2
Test Mode A (see page 22-107). F-CAN L (RED) F-CAN H
(WHT)
ON (II).
3. Wait for at least 6 seconds. F-CAN H (WHT) F-CAN L (RED)
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. 3 4 l / l 6 | 7 | / l 9 |1 0 |

11 IX
Is D T C B 1 1 6 8 o r B 1 1 6 9 in d ic a te d ? 11 / / / 1 15 16 / h e 19 20 21
■
YES-Go to step 5. ■
22 / 24 25 X
29 30 / 32 [ / 34 35I36 / 38 /
26 27 28
■
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. 1 /1 4 1 14 2 143 4 4 1 / 1 4 6 14 7 148 | / l

Check for loose or poor connections.® ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)
5. Check for Fuel and Emission system DTCs with the Terminal side offem ale terminals
HDS (see page 11-3). Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?
A r e a n y D T C s in d ic a te d ? YES-Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the

latest software (see page 11-213), or substitute a
YES-Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting, then known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), and recheck.
recheck. If the indication goes away, replace the original
NO-Go to step 6. ECM/PCM (see page 11-215). If the DTC is still present,
replace the gauge control module (see page
6 y u rn t h e ignition switch to LOCK (0). 2 2 -2 9 4 ).■
7. Disconnect the gauge control module 32P connector. NO-Repair an open or high resistance in the wires.l
8. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
9. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (49P).
DTC B1170; Gauge control module lost 9. Check for continuity between gauge control module
communication with the VSA/ABS 32P connector terminals No. 29 and No. 30 and VSA
modulator-control unit 36P connector terminals No. 1
modulator-control unit (VSA/ABS message) and No. 14 respectively.
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 32P CONNECTOR
to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis W ire side offem ale terminals
Test Mode A (see page 22-107). ri- - - - - - - - - - n
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. 1|/1 /|/|/|6 AA$V Z [ 7 P 7 [ 7 T ^
|1 7 |1 8 |1 9 |2 0 |2 1|22 |2 3 |2 4 |2 5 |/|2 7 |2 8 |2 9 |3 0 L /|3 2
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to F-CAN L (RED) F-CAN H
ON (II). (WHT)

F-CAN H
(WHT) F-CAN L (RED)
YES-Go to step 5. .. "V
I
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. I1 1 l/^ l 3 I 4 \ / \ 6 | / | 8 | 9 |l 0 1111 12 13
Check for loose or poor connections.! |t1..4wL! /■
-«■L
■■/Y| /.|.11A8 1| 1.9IT|./ I| 2m...
1 | / |1.j
2m
-3w| .
/ |i
CO
CO
35
|2 5 |2 6 |2 7 M /3 0 |/1 /1 /l3 4 |
5. Check for DTCs in the VSA or ABS system with the I
L------ 1 . - . 1-----
\
HDS.
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 36P CONNECTOR
A re a n y D T C s in d ic a te d ? W ire side of fem ale terminals
YES-Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting, then Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?

recheck.l YES-Substitute a known-good VSA
NO- modulator-control unit, and recheck. If the indication
• With VSA system: Go to step 6. goes away, replace the original VSA
modulator-control unit. If the DTC is still present,
• With ABS system: Go to step 10.
replace the gauge control module (see page
6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 22-294).B
7. Disconnect the gauge control module 32P connector. NO-Repair an open in the wires.B
8. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 36P 10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
connector.
11. Disconnect the gauge control module 32P connector.
12. Disconnect the ABS modulator-control unit 25P
connector.
(cont'd).
13. Check for continuity between gauge control module DTC B1173: Gauge control modul e lost
32P connector terminals No. 29 and No. 30 and ABS communication with jp iv is control unit
modulator-control unit 25P connector terminals No.
17 and No. 1 respectively. (TPMS message)
1l/l/l/l/l iT /7 li6 |l 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
j i t [ 1811q| 20[21[22 123[24 I25 2t1 2s12q130|^^l32
F-CAN L (RED) F-CAN H
(WHT)
ON (II).
YES-Go to step 5.
F-CAN H (WHT)
1 2 3/ 5 6/ 8 9
10 / 12 / 14 15 16
Check for loose or poor connections.!
17 18 / / / / / 24 25 5. From the system select menu, select TPMS.
I F-CAN L (RED)
D o e s t h e H D S c o m m u n ic a t e w it h t h e T P M S c o n t r o l u n it ?
ABS MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 25P CONNECTOR
Wire side offem ale terminals YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to symptom troubleshooting TPMS indicator
YES-Substitute a known-good ABS does not go off, and no DTCs are stored (see page
modulator-control unit, and recheck. If the indication 18-69).B
goes away, replace the original ABS
modulator-control unit. If the DTC is still present, 6. Check for DTCs in the TPMS with the HDS.
replace the gauge control module, (see page 22-294) A r e a n y D T C s in d ic a te d ?
YES-Go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting, then
NO-Repair an open in the wires.l recheck.
NO-Go to step 7.
9. Disconnect the TPMS control unit 20P connector.
10. Check for continuity between gauge control module D T C B 1 1 8 3 ; G a u g e c o n tr o l m o d u le lo s t
32P connector terminals No. 29 and No. 30 and TPMS c o m m u n ic a tio n w it h E P S U n it
control unit 20P connector terminals No. 11 and No. 2
respectively. NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure
T W W Ie A A * V
|17|18|19|20|Z1|22|23|24|25|/]27|28|29|30|/132 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to
F-CAN H ON (II).
(WHT)
YES-Go to step 5.
F-CAN L (RED) NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
TPMS CONTROL UN I T 20P CONNECTOR Check for loose or poor connections.■
5. Check for DTCs in the EPS with the HDS.
A re a n y D T C s in d ic a te d ?
YES-Substitute a known-good TPMS control unit, and
recheck. If the indication goes away, replace the YES-Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting, then
original TPMS control unit. If the DTC is still present, recheck.H
replace the gauge control module (see page NO-Go to step 6.
22-294).I
NO-Repair open in the wires.B
8. Disconnect EPS control unit connector A (11P).
(cont'd)
9. Check for continuity between gauge control module D T C B 1 1 8 7 : G a u g e c o n t r o l m o d u le lo s t

32P connector terminals No. 29 and No. 30 and EPS c o m m u n ic a tio n w ith th e S R S U n it (S R S
control unit connector A (IIP) terminals No. 3 and
No. 5 and body ground respectively. m essage)

W i re side of female term ina l s to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis
, Test Mode A (see page 22-107).
7 i7 n s F i7 n r
A A * V
1171181191201211221231241251/\271281291301/|32 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
F-CAN L F-CAN H 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to
(RED) (WHT)
ON (II).
l_
h H :»M I< H 6|T | 8|9| 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
F-CAN L 1 '0 IIn ’i i F-CAN H Is D T C B 1 1 8 7 in d ic a te d ?
(RED) ^1 r" (WHT)
YES-Go to step 5.
EPS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A ( IIP ) NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Wire side offem ale terminals Check for loose or poor connections.^
Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? 5. From the system select menu, select SRS.
YES-Substitute a known-good EPS control unit, and D o e s th e H D S c o m m u n ic a t e w it h th e S R S u n it ?
recheck. If the indication goes away, replace the
original EPS control unit. If the DTC is still present, YES-Go to step 6.
replace the gauge control module (see page NO-Go to SRS indicator does not go off, and no DTCs
22-294).H are stored (see page 24-165).■
NO-Repair open in the wires.l 6. Check for DTCs in the SRS with the HDS.
A r e a n y D T C s in d ic a te d ?
YES-Go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting, then
recheck.B
NO-Go to step 7.
page 22-69), then wait at least 3 minutes before
starting work.
10. Disconnect SRS unit connector A (39P).
11. Check for continuity between gauge control module DTC B1188: Gauge control module lost
32P connector terminals No. 29 and No. 30 and SRS
communication with the MICU (RM message)
unit connector A (39P) terminals No. 17 and No. 16
respectivery. NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure
/ l / l 9 ] / / l / l 131 / | / | 161
|17|18| 19|2Q|21|22|23|24|25|/| 27|28|29|30|/|32 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to
F-CAN L (RED) F-CAN H ON (II).
(WHT)
F-CAN L 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.

(RED) F-CAN H (WHT)
ii-------------- ........ .... ( "" , "L Is D T C B 1 1 8 8 in d ic a te d ?
/ / 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 / YES-Faulty gauge control module; replace the gauge
12 13 / / 16 17 18 / 20 / / / / / control module (see page 22-294).
26 27 28 29 / 31 / / / / 36 37 38 39
.-j
SRS UNIT CONNECTOR A (39P) Check for loose or poor connections between the
W ire side offem ale terminals gauge control module and the MICU.B
YES-Substitute a known-good SRS unit, and recheck.
If the indication goes away, replace the original SRS
unit. If the DTC is still present, replace the gauge
control module (see page 22-294).B
NO-Repair open in the wires.I
Gauge Control Module Input Test
NOTE: Before testing, do the gauge control module self-diagnostic function (see page 2 2 - 2 7 4 ) , and make sure the B-CAN
communication line is OK.
2. Remove the gauge control module (A) (see page 22-294), and disconnect the 32P connector (B) from it.
RED WHT BLU BLK PNK
• If the terminals are OK, go to step 4.
C a v ity Wire T e s t condition T e s t: D e s ire d r e s u lt P o s s i b l e c a u s e if d e s i r e d r e s u l t i s
n o t obtained
1 RED Combination light Attach to ground with a jumper • Faulty LEDs and bulbs
switch ON wire: • An open or high resistance in
The dash lights should come on the wire
full bright.
6 WHT Ignition switch ON Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty MICU
(II), turn signal There should be battery voltage • Faulty combination light switch
switch in RIGHT when the lights are flashing. • An open or high resistance in
the wire
9 BLU Ignition switch ON Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty MICU
(II), turn signal There should be battery voltage • Faulty combination light switch
switch in LEFT when the lights are flashing. • An open or high resistance in
the wire
18 LT Disconnect Check for continuity between the An open or high resistance in the
GRN under-dash terminal No. 18 and under-dash B-CAN wire
fuse/relay box fuse/relay box connector Q (16P)
connector Q (16P) terminal No. 3:
Disconnect the Check for continuity to ground: An open or high resistance in the
immobilizer There should be no continuity. B-CAN wire
control unit 7P
connector
(cont'd)
Gauge Control Module Input Test (cont'd)
5. Reconnect the 32P connector to the gauge control module, and do these input tests at the following connector.
• If all the input tests prove OK, the gauge control module must be faulty; replace it (see page 22-294).
not obtained
16 PNK Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 1 (10 A) fuse in the
wire
32 LT Ignition switch ON Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 22 (7.5 A) fuse in the
BLU (ID There should be battery voltage. under-dash fuse/relay box
• Blown No. 60 (50 A) fuse in the
wire
13 BLK In all ignition switch Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G501)
positions There should be less than 0.2 V. • An open or high resistance in the
wire
wire
25* BRN Ignition switch ON Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty washer fluid level switch
(II), washer fluid is There should be about 5 V. • A short to ground in the wire
half or more in the
washer reservoir
Ignition switch ON Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G201) or an open in
(II), washer fluid is There should be less than 0.2 V. the ground wire
empty in the washer • Faulty washer fluid level switch
reservoir • An open or high resistance in the
wire
24 GRY Ignition switch ON Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty brake fluid level switch
(II), brake fluid is full There should be about 5 V. • A short to ground in the wire
in the reservoir
Ignition switch ON Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G401) or an open in
(II), brake fluid is low There should be less than 0.2 V. the ground wire
in the reservoir • Faulty brake fluid level switch
wire
23 ORN Ignition switch ON Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty parking brake switch
(II), parking brake There should be less than 0.2 V. • An open or high resistance in the
lever pulled wire
Ignition switch ON Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty parking brake switch
(II), parking brake There should be about 5 V. • A short to ground in the wire
lever released
*: Canada models
Rewriting the ODO Data and Transferring the Maintenance Minder™ Data
to a New Gauge Control Module
NOTE: How to release locked odometer mileage to
• Obtain a new gauge control module before starting the original gauge control module
the rewriting process.
• Rewriting is not possible on a gauge control module If, after you attempt to transfer mileage, the odometer
that will not communicate with the HDS. display has dashes (---- —), is garbled, or shows an
• Make sure that the HDS shows the correct VIN for the incorrect value, the original gauge control module needs
vehicle you are working on. to be unlocked and restored to its original state:
• Once you have started this procedure, you must 1. Confirm that you have the latest HDS version of
complete it before removing the data link connector software.
(DLC).
2. Make sure that the HDS shows the correct VIN for the
• Connect a battery jumper box (not a battery charger)
vehicle you are working on.
to ensure that correct battery voltage ismaintained.
3. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), reconnect the
Rewriting and Transferring original gauge control module.
1. Before replacing the gauge control module, connect 4. Completely re-boot the HDS.
the HDS.
5. Clear any stored DTCs.
2. Select GAUGES from the BODY ELECTRICAL system
select menu with the HDS. 6. Navigate to
BODY ELECTRICAL/GAUGES/ADJUSTMENT/GAUGE
3. Select GAUGE CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT.
(ODO Rewrite) from the ADJUSTMENT MENU, and
follow the instructions on the display to retrieve the 7. Select LOCK RELEASE.
ODO value and the Maintenance Minder Information. 8. Follow the prompts and the odometer mileage will be
4. Replace the gauge control module (see page 22-294). restored.
5. Follow the instructions on the display to write the new 9. Start over and make sure the screen prompts are
ODO value and Maintenance Minder Data to the new followed.
gauge control module. If the data transfer fails, refer
to the instructions below to release the locked ODO
value.
Gauge Control Module Replacement
NOTE: Before replacing the gauge control module, retrieve the ODO value and the maintenance minder information
from the gauge control module with the HDS (see page 22-293).
1. Remove the instrument panel (see page 20-96).
2. Remove the four screws from the gauge control module (A).
B
3. Disconnect the 32P connector (B) from the gauge control module.
4. Install the gauge control module in the reverse order of removal.
5. Write the ODO value and maintenance minder information to the new gauge control module (see page 22-293).
MICU
(Buil t into the under-dash fuse/relay box)
Input Test page 22-298
Replacement page 22-65
Circuit Diagram
G501 G502 G501 G502 G501

- ; CAN line
LT BLU PNK
32 16 GAUGE CONTROL MODULE

BEEPER
• PARKING BRAKE
REMINDER
■ SEAT BELT REMINDER
■ KEY-IN REMINDER
• LIGHTS-ON REMINDER DIMMING
CIRCUIT
SEAT BELT BRAKE

10 V REMINDER SYSTEM
LIGHTS-ON
STABILIZING INDICATOR INDICATOR
) INDICATOR
CIRCUIT (LED) (LED)
(LED)
INDICATOR DRIVE CIRCUIT
CPU/POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT/

CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK CONTROLLER
F-CAN
TRANSCEIVER
F-CAN L F-CAN H
M/VV--4 " I t
I 2.6 kQ I
G601 G603 G501 G501

Control Unit Input Test
NOTE: Before testing, do the gauge control module self-diagnostic function (see page 22-274) to make sure the beeper
and the indicators in the gauge control module work properly, and the B-CAN and F-CAN lines are OK.
MICU
3. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connectors C, K, M, N, and Q.
CONNECTOR C(49P)
GRN
LTGRN BLU W HT GRN
CONNECTOR K (10P) CONNECTOR IVI (34P)
RED GRY BLU BLK
__i i__ z
1 2 . 3 1 2 3 6 7 8 / 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
i t 4K
23 24 / / 33 34
00
18 / 20 21V
h-
5 6 / 10
Ir—1
BLK
7 PUR
7 BLK
A GRY
CONNECTOR N (8P) CONNECTOR Q(16P)
BLK
_r L -n -
1 i—j—i 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 8
4 5 16 7 8
j— 9 10 11 / 13 14 / 16
/
BLK
• If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary and recheck the system.
5. Reconnect the connectors, turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and do these input tests at the following connectors.
Cavity W ire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if result is n o t
obtained
K10 BLK In all ignition switch Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G502)
the wire
the wire
the wire
the wire
There should be less than 0.2 V. • An open or high resistance in
the wire
more.
into the ignition There should be less than 0.2 V. open in the ground wire
switch • Faulty ignition key switch
the wire
Ignition switch in Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty ignition key switch
LOCK (0) position There should be about 5 V or • A short to ground in the wire
and ignition key more.
removed from the
ignition switch
M8 BLU Combination light Measure the voltage between • Faulty combination light
M33 BLK There should be less than 0.2 V. • An open or high resistance in
the wire
switch in any other terminals M8 and M33: switch
position than OFF There should be about 5 V or • A short to ground in the wire
more.
M7 GRY Combination light Measure the voltage between • Faulty combination light
switch (PARKING terminals M7 and M33: switch
M33 BLK position) ON There should be less than 0.2 V. • An open or high resistance in
the wire
There should be about 5 Vor • A short to ground in the wire
more.
M5 RED Combination light Measure the voltage between • Faulty combination light
switch (Headlight terminals M5 and M33: switch
M33 BLK position) ON There should be less than 0.2 V. • An open or high resistance in
the wire
more.
(cont'd)
Control Unit Input Test (cont'd)
Gauge Control Module

7. Remove the gauge control module (see page 22-294), and disconnect the 32P connector from it.
BLK PNK
9. Reconnect the connector to the gauge control module, turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and do these input tests at the
following connector.
Cavity W ire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if desired result is not
obtained
16 PNK Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 1 (10 A) fuse in the
• Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box
wire
32 LT Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 22 (7.5 A) fuse in the
BLU There should be battery voltage. under-dash fuse/relay box
• Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box
wire
wire
23 ORN Parking brake lever Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty parking brake switch
pulled There should be less than 0.2 V. • An open or high resistance in the
wire
Parking brake lever Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty parking brake switch
released There should be about 5 V. • A short to ground in the wire
10. Do the Gauge Control Module Self-diagnostic Function (see page 22-274), and check the beeper and the seat belt reminder
indicator.
• If the beeper sounds and the seat belt reminder indicator flashes, go to step 11.
• If the beeper does not sound or the seat belt reminder indicator does not flash, replace the gauge control module (see
page 22-294).
11. Substitute a known-good gauge control module, and recheck the system.
• If the symptom is gone, the gauge control module is faulty; replace it (see page 22-294).
• If the symptom is still present, the MICUis faulty; replace the under-dash fuse/relay box (see page 22-65).
Accessory Power Sockets
Test/Replacement page 22-303

Accessory Power Sockets
Circuit Diagram
BATTERYTERMINAL
FUSEBOX
ACCHOTin ON (I!)
ACCESSORY
POWER
SOCKET
jQ_
0502
Accessory Po wer Socket Test/Replacement
NOTE: If the accessory power socket does not work, 7. Remove the socket (A).
check the No. 13 (20 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay
box and ground (G502) first.
1. Remove the dashboard center lower trim (see page
20-100).
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) and the AUX
connector (B) (if equipped).
8. Remove the housing (A) from the panel.
3. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all

making good contact.
• If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair
them as necessary and recheck the system. 9. Install the power socket in the reverse order of
removal.
4. Turn the ignition switch to ACC (I).
5. Measure the voltage between the accessory power
socket 2P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
There should be battery voltage.
• If there is battery voltage, go to step 6.
• If there is no battery voltage, check for an open in
the wire.
6. Measure the voltage between the accessory power
socket terminals No. 1 and No. 2. There should be
battery voltage.
• If there is no battery voltage, check for open in the
wire or ground (G502).
Circuit Diagram
BATTERYTERMINALFUSEBOX UNDER-DASHFUSE/RELAYBOX
DASHLIGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROLLER
(Inthegauge
controlmodule)
*1:Withoutpowermirrordefogger
*2:Withpowermirrordefogger
No.29(10A)FUSE
(UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAYBOX)
Function Test
1. Remove the instrument panel (see page 20-96). Right mirror

2. Disconnect the 13P connector (A) from the power 6. Connect the terminal No. 2 to the terminal No. 11, and
mirror switch (B). the terminal No. 5 (then No. 13) to the terminal No. 6
with jumper wires, and turn the ignition switch to ON
(II). The right mirror should tilt down, then swing left.
• If the mirror does not tilt down (or does not swing
left), check for open in the GRN (or BLU) wire
between the right mirror and the power mirror
• If the mirror neither tilts down nor swings left,
repair open in the LT GRN wire.
• If the wires are OK, check the right mirror actuator
(see page 22-310).
• If the mirror works properly, check the power mirror
Left mirror
7. Connect the terminal No. 2 to the terminal No. 10, and
the terminal No. 5 (then No. 12) to the terminal No. 6
4 with jumper wires, and turn the ignition switch to ON
7 2 / 5 Wire side of
6 / 9 10 11 12 13 female term i nals (II). The left mirror should tilt down, then swing left.
/
• If the mirror does not tilt down (or does not swing
BLK ORN
left), check for open in the GRN (or PNK) wire
between the left mirror and the power mirror switch
LT GRN BLU
13P connector.
3. Choose the appropriate test based on the symptom: • If the mirror neither tilts down nor swings left,
• Both mirrors don't work, go to step 4. repair open in the ORN wire.
• Right mirror doesn't work, go to step 6. • If the wires are OK, check the left mirror actuator
• Left mirror doesn't work, go to step 7. (see page 22-310).
• If the mirror works properly, check the power mirror
B o th m irro rs switch (see page 22-309).
4. Measure the voltage between power mirror switch
13P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground with
the ignition switch to ON (II).
There should be battery voltage.
• If there is no battery voltage, check for:
- Blown No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box.
- An open in the BRN wire.
5. Measure the voltage between the terminal No. 6 and
body ground while you operate the mirrors.
There should be less than 0.2 V.
• If there is 0.2 V or more, check for:
- An open or hight resistance in the BLK wire.
- Poor ground (G501).
• If the voltage is as specified, check both mirrors
individually.
Power Mirror Switch Test/Replacement
1. Remove the instrument panel (see page 20-96). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each
switch position according to the table.
2. Disconnect the 13P connector from the power mirror
switch (A). P ow er M irro r S w itch
2 . '— ' 4 5
/ /
6 / / 9 10 11 12 13
4. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the screws

and the covers and replacement the power mirror
switch.
5. Install in the reverse order of removal.
Power Mirror Actuator Test Power Mirror Actuator
Replacement
1. Remove the front door panel (see page 20-6). Rem oval
2. Disconnect the power mirror 6P connector (A). 1. Remove these items:
• Mirror holder (see page 20-39)
• Power mirror (see page 20-38)
2. Record the power mirror connector terminals location
and the wire harness colors.
3. Disassemble the power mirror connector (A), and
remove the terminals (B) from the connector.

ground according to the table.
P o w e r M irro r A c tu a to r
\ Terminal
6 5 4
Position '\ s
4. Remove the gasket (A) and the cover (B).
TILT UP © ©
TILT DOWN 0 ©
SWING LEFT © ©
SWING RIGHT © ©
4. If the mirror fails to work properly, check for an open

in the wire between the connector and the mirror
holder. If the wire is OK, replace the mirror actuator
(see page 22-310).
D e fo g g er T e st
5. Measure the resistance between terminals No. 1 and
No. 3 of the 6P connector. There should be about 7 O.
6. If the resistance is not as specified, check for an open
in the wire between the connector and the mirror 5. Remove the three screws, and separate the mirror
holder. If the wire is OK, replace the mirror holder (see housing (C) from the bracket (D).
page 20-39).
6. Remove the four screws, and separate the power Installation
mirror actuator (A) from the housing (B).
1. Route the wire harness of the new actuator through
the hole in the bracket and gasket, then install the
parts in the reverse order of removal.
2. Insert the new actuator terminals into the connector in
the original arrangement
ORN
[ORN]
ri_£.
BLK 1 F=l 7
[BLK]
3 4 5 6
—
BLU LT GRN GRN
[PNK] [ORN] [GRN]

[ ]: Left mirror
(cont'd)
Power Mirror Actuator Replacement (cont'd)
3. Apply tape in the areas shown (A), to seal the wire

harness.
4. Reassemble in the reverse order of disassembly.

NOTE: Be careful not to break the mirror when
reinstalling it to the actuator.
5. Reinstall the mirror assembly on the door.
6. Operate the power mirror to ensure smooth
operation.
HEATER CONTROL PANEL

Circuit Diagram
BATTERYTERMINAL *1:Withoutpowermirrordefogger
FUSEBOX UNDER-DASHFUSE/RELAYBOX *2;Withpowermirrordefogger
BATTERY
No.1(100A)
— c tx jd —
© -
IGNITIONSW
ITCH
V IG2 J
IG2HOTinON(II)
DASHLIGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROLLER JX
(Inthegauge
controlmodule)
G502 G602
Switch Test/Replacement Function Test
1. Remove the heater control panel (see page 21-13). NOTE:

2. Disconnect the 5P connector (A), and remove the rear • Before testing, check the No. 10 (7.5 A) and No. 59
window defogger switch (B). (20 A) [(30 A)], fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
• Aftermarket window tinting should be removed
before testing.
• When testing the defogger, hold a cup of hot steaming
water near the glass. The steam can help diagnose a
broken or under-performing defogger grid.
• Be careful not to scratch or damage the defogger
wires with the tester probe.
[ ]: With power mirror defogger
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then turn the rear
window defogger switch ON.
2. Measure the voltage between rear window defogger
A (1P) positive terminal and body ground. There
should be battery voltage.
3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each • If there is no voltage, check for:
switch position according to the table. - Faulty rear window defogger relay.
- Faulty rear window defogger switch.
Terminal
5 4 1 2 3
- An open or high resistance in the BLU wire to the
Position positive terminal.
OFF o - -o o -o • If there is battery voltage, go to step 3.
ON o- -o ao -o
4. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the cover
(A), and replace the switch (B) or bulb (C).
3. Measure the voltage between rear window defogger

B (1P) negative terminal and body ground. There
should be less than 0.2 V.
If there is greater than 0.2 V, check for an open in the
ground (BLK) wire or poor ground (G602). If there is
0.2 V or less, go to step 4.
(cont'd)
Function Test (cont'd) Defogger Wire Repair
4. To avoid damaging the defogger grid, wrap a single NOTE: To make an effective repair, the broken section
strand of bare copper wire or aluminum foil around must be no longer than 25 mm (1.0 in).
the voltmeter probe. Use the foil or wire as a contact 1. Lightly rub the area around the broken section (A)
brush when moving across the defogger grid. with fine steel wool, then clean it with isopropyl
alcohol.
5. Touch the voltmeter positive probe along each 2. Carefully mask above and below the broken portion of
defogger wire, and the negative probe to the negative the defogger wire (B) with cellophane tape (C).
terminal.
3. Using a small brush, apply a heavy coat of silver
NOTE: Touch the copper wire or aluminum foil conductive paint (commercially available) (A)
wrapped around the probe, not the probe, to avoid extending about 1/8" on both sides of the break. Allow
damaging the defogger wires. 25 minutes to dry.
• If the voltage is as specified, the defogger wire up to
that point is OK.
• If the voltage is not as specified, repair the defogger
wire.
- If voltage is more than specified at one of the
points, there is a break or high resistance toward
the negative half of the wire.
- If voltage is less than specified at one of the
points, there is a break or high resistance toward
the positive half of the wire.
4. Do the function test to confirm that the wire is

repaired.
5. Apply a second coat of paint in the same way. Let it
dry 3 hours before removing the tape.
IMMOBILIZER KEY
(Without keyless transmitter)
n\
IMMOBILIZER KEY
(With keyless transmit ter)
(Built into the MICU) Symptom Troub l eshooting, page 22-323

Replacement page 22-65 Input Test, page 22-332
Registration, page 22-335
System Description
The vehicle is equipped with a Type VII immobilizer system that disables the vehicle unless a programmed ignition key
is used.
This system consists of a transponder combined with a keyless transmitter, an immobilizer-keyless control unit, the
MICU (has a built-in imoes unit), an immobilizer indicator, and the ECM/PCM.
When the immobilizer key (programmed by the HDS) is inserted into the ignition switch and turned to ON (II), the
immobilizer-keyless control unit sends a signal to the transponder. The transponder then sends a coded signal back to
the immobilizer-keyless control unit which then sends a coded signal to the ECM/PCM and the MICU (imoes unit).
The ECM/PCM and MICU (imoes unit) identify this coded signal, then voltage is supplied to the fuel pump.
control unit*
(Has a built-i n receiver)
* : The immobilizer-keyless control unit can store up to 6 immobilizer keys per vehicle; the original 2 keys that came
with the vehicle, and up to four more keys can be added.
If the wrong key is used or the code was not received or recognized the indicator flashes once, then it blinks until the
ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0). When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK (0) position, the indicator blinks ten
times to signal that unit has reset correctly, then the indicator goes off.
Circuit Diagram
*1 : '09-10 models and '11-12 models (M/T)

*2:'11-12 models (A/T)
-------------- : CAN line
BATTERYTERMINAL .............- - - - ; Other communication line
BLK*2
XL
G101 G501
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC B1905: Immobilizer unit lost DTC B1906; I m m o b i l i z e r u n i t l o s t

communication with MICU(door lock switch c o m m u n ic a tio n w ith G a u g e c o n tro l m o d u le
message) (A /T m e s s a g e )
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure
to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis
Test Mode A (see page 22-107). Test Mode A (see page 22-107).
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to
ON (II). ON (II).
3. Wait for at least 6 seconds. 3. Wait for at least 6 seconds.
4. Check for DTCs witch the HDS. 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
Is D T C B 1 9 0 5 in d ic a t e d ? Is D T C B 1 9 0 6 in d ic a t e d ?
YES-Faultyimmobilizer-keyless control unit; replace YES-Go to step 5.
the immobilizer-keyless control unit (see page
22-336).
Check for loose or poor connections between the
NO-lntermittent failure, the immobilizer-keyless gauge control module and the immobilizer-keyless
control unit is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor control u n it.l
connections between the immobilizer-keyless control
5. From the BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM SELECT menu,
unit and the MICU.B
select B-CAN CONTROL UNITS INFORMATION, and
then select CHECK CONNECTED CONTROL UNITS.
Is th e g a u g e c o n tr o l m o d u le d e te c t e d ?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 6.
6. Measure the voltage between gauge control module 10. Check for continuity between immobilizer-keyless
32P connector terminals No. 16 and No. 32 and body control unit 7P connector terminal No. 4 and the
ground individually. gauge control module 32P connector terminal No. 18.
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 32P CONNECTOR GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 32P CONNECTOR
Wire side of female term ina l s
'i p T /T T T T I T / l / | 9 | / / M l 3 | / l / l l 6 |
|17|18|i 9|20|21|22|23|24[25|/|27|28|29|30L/]32
'n T W I T T e 7 1 / | 9 | / / | / | 1 3 | / | / | 1 6 |
B-CAN (LT G!RN)
|1T| 18|19|20| 21|22|23|24|25|/| 27|28|29|30|/|32
IG1 (LT BLU) ------® ------
B-CAN (LT GRN)
lL==ri .............
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS CONTROL UNIT 7P CONNECTOR

W ire side offem ale terminals Wire side offem ale terminals
Is th e r e b a tte r y v o lta g e ? Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Go to step 8. YES-Replace the gauge control module (see page
22-294).H
NO-Check the No. 1 (10 A) and the No. 20 (15 A) fuses
in the under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is blown, NO-Repair an open or high resistance in the wire.B
replace the fuse and recheck the DTCs. If the fuses are
OK, repair an open in the wire between the
under-dash fuse/relay box and the gauge control
module.H
7. Measure the voltage between gauge control module
ground indiviually.
l / l / l / l / |6 f / M 9 |/ W |'3|/|/1 16
117 [ 18119 j 20 [2l|22 | 23124 [ 13oj / | 32
GND (BLK) GND (BLK)
Wire side offem ale terminals
Is th e re le s s th a n 0 .2 V ?
YES-Go to step 8.
poor ground (G501J.B
9. Disconnect immobilizer-keyless control unit 7P
connector.
Symptom Troubleshooting Information
General Check Before Troubleshooting

Before troubleshooting the immobilizer system, check the following general items and solve any applicable system
issues:
• The battery is low; charge the battery fully, then troubleshoot the immobilizer system.
• The ignition key is not a genuine Honda part; use a Honda-approved key blank, register the key, then troubleshoot the
immobilizer system.
• A key ring, keys, or a key case is used; remove the key from it, and troubleshoot the immobilizer system with the key
only.
• An aftermarket electrical part is installed; remove it, then troubleshoot the immobilizer system.
Symptom Troubleshooting Using the Immobilizer Indicator Lighting Pattern

The pattern of the immobilizer indicator can help troubleshoot the condition of the immobilizer system. Here are
descriptions of the four possible patterns:
N o rm al o p e ra tio n
If the immobilizer code is identified, the immobilizer indicator quickly flashes once when the ignition switch is turned to
ON (II).
The immobilizer indicator does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0).
I m m o b i l iz e r c o d e is n o t i d e n t i f ie d
If the immobilizer code is not identified, the immobilizer indicator quickly flashes once, then will blinks until the ignition
switch is turned to LOCK (0). When the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0), the indicator blinks ten times, then goes
OFF.
The state of the immobilizer key registration and the S-NET line can be checked by doing a SYSTEM CHECK (see page
22-328) and STATUS LOG CHECK (see page 22-330) with the HDS.
Im m o b iliz e r in d ic a to r d o e s n o t c o m e o n
If the immobilizer indicator does not come on after turning the ignition switch to ON (II), there is an open or short in the
F-CAN lines between the ECM/PCM and the gauge control module. Watch the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). If the
MIL stays on, go to PGM-FI system troubleshooting (see page 11-3).
I m m o b i l i z e r i n d i c a t o r d o e s n o t g o off
If the immobilizer indicator does not go off after turning the ignition switch to ON (II), do the gauge control module
self-diagnostic function (see page 22-274). If the indicator drive circuit is OK, do the SYSTEM CHECK (see page 22-328)
and STATUS LOG (see page 22-330) CHECK with the HDS.
(cont'd)
Symptom Troubleshooting Information (cont'd)
Symptom Troubleshooting Using Malfunctioning Circuit Functions

If a malfunction occurs in the immobilizer circuit, use the table to cross-reference the malfunction criteria to the line(s)
that should be checked in the table:
\ Function
Line Error \ Imm ob i lizer Key Tester
Engine Start Keyless Operation
Indicator Registration Communication
Terminal Cause of
No. Malfunction
1 VBU line open Comes on, Possible Possible Possible Impossible

(PNK) or short then goes off.
2 IG1 line open Blinking Impossible Impossible Impossible Possible

(RED) or short
3 S-NET line Blinking Impossible Possible Impossible Possible

(GRN) open or short
Immobilizer:
4 B-CAN line Comes on, Possible
(LT open or short then goes off. Possible Possible Impossible
GRN) Keyless:
Impossible
K-LINE line Comes on, Possible Impossible Impossible Possible
(BLU) open or short then goes off.
IG KEYSW line Possible
6 open Comes on, (in spite of the key is
(GRY) Possible Possible Possible in the ignition switch)
IG KEYSW line then goes off.
short to ground Impossible
7 GND (LG) line
(BRN) Blinking I mpossible Impossible Impossible Impossible
open
System Check (Current status) and Status Log (History log if the immobilizer system kept engine
from running)
NOTE: The HDS can be used to:
• Check the state of the immobilizer key registration and the S-NET line by doing a SYSTEM CHECK.
• Check the number of times the immobilizer-keyless control unit does not permit the engine to run by checking the
STATUS LOG (see page 22-330).
1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC), then turn the ignition switch to ON (II) and follow the prompts to the
SYSTEM SELECTION MENU.
NOTE: If the HDS does not communicate with the vehicle, go to DLC circuit troubleshooting (see page 11-193).
2. At SYSTEM SELECTION MENU , enter IMMOBILIZER, then select the IMMOBILIZER SETUP.
3. Do the SYSTEM CHECK (see page 22-328). If there is a system check number, do the troubleshooting for the item
indicated.
4. Check the STATUS LOG using the HDS (see page 22-330). Troubleshooting the line with the highest counts first. If all
the lines are 0 (zero), the problem may not be caused by the immobilizer system; check for ignition or fuel problems.
Refer to PGM-FI System Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 11-3).
NOTE: Once repaired, clear the status log by removing the No. 1 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box or
disconnecting the battery.
Symptom Troubleshooting Index
1. Troubleshoot the immobilizer system in the order shown:

O rd er of S y m p to m P o s s ib le c a u s e
P rio rity
1 Immobilizer indicator blinks. Symptom troubleshooting (see page 22-326).
2 Engine does not start with the Symptom troubleshooting (see page 22-327).
immobilizer key.
3 Immobilizer indicator does not come Check the MIL indication.
on. • if the MIL comes on, go to the PGM-FI System MIL
circuit troubleshooting (see page 11-192).
• If the MIL does not come on, go to the gauge control
module self-diagnostic function (see page 22-274).
4 Immobilizer indicator does not go off. Symptom troubleshooting (see page 22-327).
Symptom Troubleshooting
Immobilizer indicator blinks 9. Back-probe and measure the voltage between

immobilizer-keyless control unit7P connector
NOTE: Before troubleshooting, check the items listed in terminal No. 2 and body ground.
"General Check before Troubleshooting" (see page
22-323).
2. Connect the HDS, then turn the ignition switch to ON g==p ____ _
(II). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
I IG1 (RED)
3. From the SYSTEM SELECTION MENU, enter IMMOBI,
select IMMOBILIZER SETUP, then select System (2)
Check, Number of Keys, and Status Log.
4. Select the SYSTEM CHECK.
Is S Y S T E M C H E C K in d ic a t e d ? W ire side of female term ina l s
YES-Troubleshoot the immobilizer system according
to the result of the SYSTEM CHECK (see page Is th e re b a tte r y v o lta g e ?
22-328).H
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Go to step 5.
NO-Check for a blown No. 20 (15 A) fuse in the
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, repair an
6. Enter the vehicle, and remove the ignition key from open in the RED wire between the under-dash
the ignition switch, then close the all doors. fuse/relay box and the immobilizer-keyless control
unit.H
7. Operate the keyless transmitter LOCK and UNLOCK
several times in the vehicle. 10. Back-probe and measure the voltage between
immobilizer-keyless control unit 7P connector
D o th e d o o r lo c k a c tu a to r s w o r k n o r m a lly ? terminal No. 7 and body ground.
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Check for a poor ground (G101) and/or an open in
the wire between the immobilizer-keyless control unit
7P connector terminal No. 7 and body ground n==i ____
(G101).H 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Is th e re le s s th a n 0 .2 V ?
YES-Replace the immobilizer-keyless control unit
(see page 22-336).B
NO-Repair poor connection or an open or high
resistance between immobilizer-keyless control unit
7P connector terminal No. 7 and body ground G101 . ■
Engine does not start w ith the immobilizer Immobilizer indicator does not go off
key 1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
NOTE: Before troubleshooting, check the items listed in 2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC).
"General Check before Troubleshooting" (see page
22-323). 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
1. Try to start the engine. 4. From the SYSTEM SELECTION MENU, enter IMMOBI,
select IMMOBILIZER SET UP, then select SYSTEM
D o e s th e e n g in e s ta r t? CHECK, NUMBER OF KEYS, and STATUS LOG.
YES-lntermittent failure, the vehicle is OK at this time. Note: If the HDS does not communicate with the
Check STATUS LOG (see page 22-330).B immobilizer-keyless control unit, check the power,
NO-Go to step 2. ground, and K-line connectors.
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 5. Do the SYSTEM CHECK with the HDS.
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check the is N - 1 in d ic a t e d ?
immobilizer indicator. YES-Do the indicator drive circuit check (see page
D o e s th e in d ic a t o r b r in k o n c e , t h e n s ta y o ff? 22-274). If the indicator does not go off; replace the
gauge control module (see page 22-294).B
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Substitute a known-good immobilizer-keyless
NO-Go to Immobilizer indicator blinks control unit, then register it and recheck. If the
troubleshooting (see page 22-326).! symptom goes away, replace the original
4. Turn the ignition switch to START (III). immobilizer-keyless control unit (see page 22-336).!
D o e s th e s ta r te r m o to r ru n ?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to Starting System, and check the starter
motor (see page 4-10).■
5. Try to start the engine with the immobilizer key.
D o e s th e e n g in e s ta r t?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to the PGM-FI System Symptom
Troubleshooting (see page 11-3).B
6. Wait for a few minutes with the engine running.
D o e s th e e n g in e s to p ?
YES-Go to the PGM-FI System Symptom
Troubleshooting (see page 11-3).B
NO-The system is OK at this time.B
System Check
1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC).

3. On the HDS screen, at SYSTEM SELECTION MENU, enter IMMOBI, then select IMMOBILIZER SETUP, select
SYSTEMCHECK, NUMBER OF KEYS and STATUS LOG, then select SYSTEM CHECK.
Note: If the HDS does not communicate with the immobilizer keyless control unit, check the power, ground, and K-line
connectors.
4. If the HDS displays N-1, the immobilizer system is OK at this time, refer to the STATUS LOG. If the HDS displays any
other messages, check as follows:
System Check Status Log. System Check Possible Failures
No. Indication
N-1 Possible Normal
A-1 Possible The key is not • This key is not registered in the immobilizer-keyless
registered control unit. Try to register keys by using "KEYS".
• No communication between the antenna and the
immobilizer key because of interference from metal
such as key chains/key rings/other keys.
• Low battery voltage.
A-2 Possible Communication • Intermittent interruption between transponder and
error between the immobilizer-keyless control unit.
key and • The immobilizer key type is different. It is not for this
immobilizer- vehicle but for another one or for another company's
keyless control one.
unit • Key failure (transponder failure)
A-3 Possible No • The ignition switch was turned to ON (II) with a
communication non-immobilizer key.
between the key • The immobilizer key type is different It is not for this
and vehicle but for another one or for another company's
immobilizer-key one.
less control unit • Key failure (transponder failure)
• Immobilizer-keyless control unit failure
B-1 Possible The ECM/PCM is • The ECM/PCM was not registered. Try to register the
not registered ECM/PCM using "REPLACE ECM/PCM".
• No communication between the ECM/PCM and the
immobilizer-keyless control unit because of low battery
voltage.
• No communication between the immobilizer-keyless
control unit and the ECM/PCM because of interference.
• Open in the IG1 line
B-2 Possible Error of • The ECM/PCM was not registered. Try to register the
communication ECM/PCM using "REPLACE ECM/PCM".
format in • No communication between the ECM/PCM and the
ECM/PCM immobilizer-keyless control unit because of low battery
voltage.
S y s te m C h e ck S ta tu s Log. S y s te m C h eck P o s s ib le F a ilu re s
No. In d ic a tio n
e -1 Possible The imoes unit is • Imoes unit was not registered.
not registered • No communication between the imoes unit and the
voltage.
• No communication between the imoes unit and the
immobilizer-keyless control unit because of
interference.
• Try to register the imoes unit with the HDS.
C-2 Possible Error of • Imoes unit was not registered.
communication • No communication between the imoes unit and the
format between immobilizer-keyless control unit because of low battery
Imoes unit. voltage.
• No communication between the imoes unit and the
interference.
• Try to register the imoes unit with the HDS.
D-1 Possible S-NET line short • S-NET line short from the ECM/PCM to the
immobilizer-keyless control unit. (S-NET line short)
• No communication between the ECM/PCM and the
voltage.
unit and the ECM/PCM because of interference.
• ECM/PCM failure
D-2 Possible No • Blown fuse
communication • S-NET line open from the imoes unit to the
between imoes im mobi Iizer-key Iess control unit. (S-NET line open)
unit and • No communication between the imoes unit and the
immobilizer-key immobilizer-keyless control unit because of low battery
less control unit voltage.
(S-NET line) • No communication between the imoes unit and the
interference.
• Imoes unit failure.
D-3 Possible No • Blown fuse
communication • S-NET line open from the ECM/PCM to the
between immobilizer-keyless control unit.
ECM/PCM and • No communication between the ECM/PCM and the
immobilizer-key immobilizer-keyless control unit because of low battery
less control unit voltage.
(S-NET) • No communication between the immobilizer-keyless
• ECM/PCM failure
E-1 Initial registration The immobilizer-keyless control unit is not registered. Try
E-2 of to register the immobilizer-keyless control unit using the
E-3 immobilizer-key HDS.
E-4 less control unit is
E-5 not completed
F-1 Special Mode Turn the ignition switch to ON (II) and to LOCK (0) with the
F-2 registered key.
F-3
F-4
F-5
Status Log
If you suspect there is a immobilizer system problem, check the status log in the HDS.
3. On the HDS screen, at SYSTEM SELECTION MENU, enter IMMOBI, then select IMMOBILIZER SETUP, select System
Check, Number of Keys and Status Log, then select STATUS LOG.
4. Check the STATUS LOG count. Troubleshoot the status with the highest count first. If no counts are listed, the
immobilizer system is OK. Continue with normal symptom troubleshooting.
Status Log Detected Item Probable Cause
No.
A-1 KEY CODE MISMATCH© ® The key was not registered
(Code format correct, but • Interference from metal such as key chains
code data does not match) • Low battery voltage
A-2 KEY CODE MISMATCH® • Ignition switch was turned to ON (II) with another type of
(Incorrect code format) immobilizer key or aftermarket key
• Interference from metal such as key chains
• Low battery voltage
A-3 KEY CODE MISMATCH® • Ignition switch was turned to ON (II) with another type of
(No transponder detected) immobilizer key or aftermarket key
• Interference from metal such as key chains
• Low battery voltage
• Key failure
B-1 ECM/PCM CODE • ECM/PCM was not registered correctly
MISMATCH® • Low battery voltage
(Code format correct, but • Poor or loose terminal connections at the immobilizer-keyless
code data does not match) control unit
• Communication line electrical noise
B-2 ECM/PCM MISMATCH® • ECM/PCM was not registered correctly
(Incorrect code format) • Low battery voltage
• Poor or loose terminal connections at the immobilizer-keyless
control unit
C-1 IMOES UNIT • Imoes unit was not registered
MISMATCH® • The communication was not good between imoes unit and
(Code format correct, but immobilizer-keyless control unit by battery voltage low
data does not match) • The communication was not good between imoes unit and
immobilizer-keyless control unit by influence of some noise
C-2 IMOES UNIT • Imoes unit was not registered correctly
MISMATCH® • The communication was not good between imoes unit and
(Incorrect code format) immobilizer-keyless control unit by battery voltage low
• The communication was not good between imoes unit and
D-1 S-NET LINE PROBLEM® • Low battery voltage
(Short to ground) • Poor or loose terminal connections at the immobilizer-keyless
control unit and the ECM/PCM
D-2 S-NET LINE PROBLEM© • Blown fuse
(No communication) • Harness open from imoes unit to immobilizer-keyless control unit
immobilizer-keyless control unit by battery voltage low
• Imoes unit failure
S ta tu s Log D e te c te d Ite m P ro b a b le C a u se
No.
D-3 S-NET LINE PROBLEM® • Open or short in the harness from the ECM/PCM to the
(Open line or ECM/PCM immobilizer-keyless control unit
failure) • Low battery voltage
• Poor or loose terminal connections at the immobilizer-keyless
control unit and the ECM/PCM
• Poor S-NET data communication due to electrical interference
Immobilizer-Keyless Control Unit Input Test
NOTE:
• SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations (see page 24-13), and precautions and
procedures (see page 24-15) before doing repairs or servicing.
• Before testing, troubleshoot the multiplex integrated control unit first, using B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A
(see page 22-107).
1. Remove the steering co l umn covers (see page 20-105).
2. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the immobilizer-keyless control unit (B).
PNK GRN BLU BRN

/ /
1 2 3 4 5 6
RED Lt grn GRY
C a v ity W ire T erm in al T e s t c o n d itio n T e s t: D e s ire d r e s u lt P o s s i b l e c a u s e if d e s i r e d
nam e result is n o t o b t a i n e d
4 LT B-CAN Disconnect the gauge Check for continuity An open or high
GRN control module 32P between the terminal No. 4 resistance in the wire
connector and the gauge control
module 32P connector
terminal No. 18:
Disconnect driver's Check for continuity An open or high
under-dash fuse/relay box between the terminal No. 4 resistance in the wire
connector Q (16P) and driver's under-dash
fuse/relay box connector Q
(16P) terminal No. 3:
3 GRN S-NET Disconnect ECM/PCM Measure the voltage to • A short to ground in the
connector A (49P)* (see ground: wire
page 11-6) There should be about 5 V. • An open or high
Disconnect ECM/PCM Check for continuity An open or high
connector A (49P)* (see
between the terminal No. 3 resistance in the wire
page 11-6) and ECM/PCM connector A
(49P) terminal No. 46:
*: To disconnect the ECM/PCM connectors, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and jump the SCS line with the HDS.
(cont'd)
Immobilizer-Keyless Control Unit Input Test (cont'd)
5. Reconnect the connector to the immobilizer-keyless control unit, and do these input tests at the following connector.
• If all the input tests prove OK, replace the immobilizer-keyless control unit (see page 22-336).
NOTE: After replacing the immobilizer-keyless control unit, do immobilizer registration (see page 22-335).
C a v ity Wire T e rm in a l T e s t condition T e s t: D e sire d re s u lt P o s s i b l e c a u s e if d e s i r e d
nam e r e s u lt is n o t o b ta in e d
1 PNK VBU Under all conditions Measure the voltage to • Blown No. 1 (10 A) fuse
ground: in the under-dash
There should be battery fuse/relay box
voltage. 9 An open or high
2 RED IG1 Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to • Blown No. 20 (15 A)
ground: fuse in the under-dash
There should be battery fuse/relay box
voltage. • An open or high
7 BRN LG In all ignition switch Measure the voltage to • Poor ground (G101)
position ground: • An open or high
There should be less than resistance in the wire
0.2 V.
5 BLU K-LINE Under all conditions Measure the voltage to • Faulty control unit on
ground: There should be the K-line
pulse voltage (digital • Short to ground in the
signal). K-line wire
Immobilizer Key Registration
NOTE: All Keys are Lost

• The HDS is required for registration of the immobilizer
keys. 1. Prepare all new keys and have the immobilizer
• Programming the immobilizer also programs the ECM/PCM code.
keyless transmitter. 2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC).
• Check for aftermarket electrical equipment that can
cause problems with transponder operation. 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
• The immobilizer-keyless control unit can store up to 4. Select IMMOBI from the SYSTEM SELECT menu, then
six immobilizer keys. select IMMOBILIZER SETUP.
Add One New Key/Keyless Transmitter 5. Select Add and Delete keys, then All keys lost.
1. Have a registered key, a new immobilizer key, and the 6. Do the registration according to the instructions on
first password from the iN system. the HDS screen.
2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC). 7. Check if the engine can be started using all the
registered keys, and check that the door locks operate
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). using the immobilizer key transmitter.
4. Select IMMOBI from the SYSTEM SELECT menu, then 8. When prompted by the HDS, do the keyless
select IMMOBILIZER SETUP. transmitter programming.
5. Select Add and Delete keys, then Add 1 key.
6. Do the registration according to the instructions on
the HDS screen.
7. Check if the engine can be started with the newly
registered key check that the door locks operate using
the immobilizer key transmitter.
8. When prompted by the HDS, do the keyless
transmitter programming.
Add and Delete Keys/Keyless Transmitters,

Then Select Delete or Add keys
1. Have all registered keys, all new keys, and the first
password from the iN system.
4. Select IMMOBI from the SYSTEM SELECT menu, then
select IMMOBILIZER SETUP.
5. Select Add and Delete Keys, or Delete or Add Multiple
Keys.
the HDS screen.
7. Check if the engine can be started with all the
registered keys check that the door locks operate
using the immobilizer key transmitter.
Registration for Immobilizer Immobilizer-Keyless Control Unit
System Replacement
1. Have all registered keys and the PCM code. NOTE: SRS components are located in the area. Review
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). doing repairs or servicing.
4. Select IMMOBI from the SYSTEM SELECTION MENU, 1. Remove the steering column covers (see page
then select the IMMOBILIZER SETUP. 20-105).
5. Select REPLACE IMMOBILIZER/KEYLESS CONTROL 2. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the
UNIT REPLACE. immobilizer-keyless control unit (B).
the HDS screen.
7. Check that the engine can be started with all
registered keys.
3. Remove the two screws and the immobilizer-keyless

control unit
4. Install the immobilizer-keyless control unit in the
reverse order of removal.
5. After replacement, register the immobilizer-keyless
control unit (all of the customer's keys are required)
(see page 22-335), and make sure the immobilizer
system works properly.

Body Electrical

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Body Electrical

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Body Electrical

Body Electrical B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode

Ignition Switch Exterior Lights

Ref. No. Tool Number Description Qty

Handling Connectors • Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their

• Before connecting connectors, make sure the

• The backs of some connectors are packed with

• Insert the connector al l the way and make sure it is

• Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for

2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).

GAUGE CONTROL MODULE

POW ER W IN D O W M A STER SW ITC H

Battery Ground Cable

Engine Ground Cable

Transmission Ground Cable

Engine Wire Harness (M/T)

CKP Sensor Subharness

Engine Wire Harness (A/T) (Engine section)

CKP Sensor Subharness

Engine Wire Harness (A/T) (Transmission section)

Shift Solenoid Wire Harness

Transmission Range Switch Subharness

Right Engine Compartment Wire Harness (Engine compartment branch)

Right Engine Compartment Wire Harness (Dashboard branch)

Left Engi ne Compartment Wire Harness (Engine compartment branch)

Left Engi ne Compartment Wire Harness (Dashboard branch)

Dashboard Wire Harness (View of driver's side)

Dashboard Wire Harness (View of middle section) (With Navigation)

Blower Resistor Subharness (With Navigation)

Dashboard Wire Harness (View of middle section) (Without N avig atio n )

B lo w e r Resistor Subharness (Without Navigation)

Dashboard Wire Harness (View of passenger's side) (With Navigation)

Dashboard Wire Harness (View of passenger's side) (Without Navigation)

USB Adapter Cable (Without Navigation)

Floor Wire Harness (Left branch)

Floor Wire Harness (Right branch)

Tailgate Wire Harness

Driver's Door Wire Harness

FRONT PASSENGER'S DOOR

Left Rear Door Wire Harness

LEFT REAR DOOR WIRE HARNESS

RIGHT REAR DOOR WIRE HARNESS

ODS Unit Harness

Fuel Tank Subharness

Battery Terminal Fuse Box

View of front side

View of back side

Under-Dash Relay Holder

Battery Terminal Fuse Box

Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box

UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

Ground Component or circuit grounded

Removal and Installation

USA models Installation

5. Remove the mounting bolts (B) and the terminal (C).

Removal and Installation (cont'd)

A WARNING Using the ED-18 Battery Tester

4. Apply multipurpose grease to the terminals to

Installation Special Tools Required

1. Install the battery (A), then install the battery setting

NOTE: If using a digital multimeter, go to step 13.

19. Check if there are any aftermarket electrical

Are the aftermarket electrical accessories installed

YES-Check the parasitic draw (see page 22-71 ) . ■